Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/ONEWS @ 61263:56619c3aaf99
(fancy-splash-text): Shorten default text of
"Emacs Tutorial" line. Also, if the current language env
indicates an available tutorial file other than TUTORIAL,
extract its title and append it to the line in parentheses.
(fancy-splash-insert): If arg is a thunk, funcall it.
author | Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 04 Apr 2005 07:41:58 +0000 |
parents | 695cf19ef79e |
children | f0eb34e60705 375f2633d815 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25853 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 1992. |
35782
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1995, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | |
33644 | 5 For older news, see the file ONEWS.4. |
25853 | 6 |
35782
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
7 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
8 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
9 * Changes in Emacs 19.33. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
10 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
11 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
12 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
13 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
14 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
15 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
16 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
17 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
18 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
19 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
20 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
21 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
22 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
23 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
24 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
25 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
26 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
27 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
28 all caps. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
29 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
30 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
31 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
32 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
33 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
34 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
35 as in previous Emacs versions. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
36 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
37 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
38 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
39 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
40 frames. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
41 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
42 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
43 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
44 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
45 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
46 accident. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
47 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
48 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
49 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
50 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
51 line and then executing the macro. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
52 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
53 This command is not new, but was never documented before. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
54 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
55 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
56 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
57 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
58 characters. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
59 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
60 ** Font Lock mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
61 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
62 *** Font Lock support modes |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
63 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
64 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
65 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
66 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
67 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
68 Font Lock mode is enabled. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
69 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
70 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
71 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
72 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
73 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
74 in your ~/.emacs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
75 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
76 *** lazy-lock |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
77 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
78 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
79 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
80 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
81 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
82 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
83 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
84 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
85 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
86 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
87 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
88 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
89 |
46989 | 90 To control the package behavior, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. |
35782
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
91 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
92 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
93 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
94 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
95 paren and key. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
96 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
97 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
98 supported. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
99 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
100 ** Gnus changes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
101 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
102 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
103 commands and variables have been added. There should be no |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
104 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
105 previously released version, except in the message composition area. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
106 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
107 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
108 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
109 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
110 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
111 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
112 obsolete. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
113 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
114 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
115 missing articles are represented by empty nodes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
116 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
117 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
118 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
119 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
120 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
121 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
122 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
123 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
124 referred. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
125 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
126 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
127 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
128 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
129 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
130 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
131 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
132 (setq gnus-use-trees t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
133 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
134 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
135 buffers. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
136 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
137 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
138 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
139 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
140 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
141 `M-x gnus-binary-mode' |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
142 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
143 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
144 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
145 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
146 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
147 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
148 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
149 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
150 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
151 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
152 is possible. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
153 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
154 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
155 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
156 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
157 groups of groups. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
158 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
159 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
160 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
161 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
162 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
163 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
164 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
165 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
166 *** The Gnus cache is much faster. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
167 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
168 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
169 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
170 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
171 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
172 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
173 expiration times. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
174 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
175 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
176 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
177 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
178 process marked articles on the `M P' submap. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
179 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
180 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
181 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
182 bound to keys on the `/' submap. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
183 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
184 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
185 articles with the `*' command. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
186 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
187 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
188 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
189 *** Article headers can be buttonized. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
190 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
191 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
192 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
193 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
194 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
195 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
196 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
197 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
198 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
199 buffer. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
200 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
201 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
202 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
203 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
204 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
205 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
206 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
207 (setq gnus-use-nocem t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
208 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
209 *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
210 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
211 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
212 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
213 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
214 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
215 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
216 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
217 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
218 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
219 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
220 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
221 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
222 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
223 refetching. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
224 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
225 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
226 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
227 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
228 buffer to allow easier treatment. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
229 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
230 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
231 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
232 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
233 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
234 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
235 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
236 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
237 articles. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
238 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
239 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
240 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
241 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
242 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
243 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
244 cited text to hide is now customizable. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
245 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
246 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
247 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
248 *** Boring headers can be hidden. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
249 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
250 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
251 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
252 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
253 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
254 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
255 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
256 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
257 in greater detail. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
258 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
259 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
260 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
261 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
262 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
263 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
264 exists. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
265 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
266 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
267 as well as lists. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
268 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
269 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
270 of a given keymap. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
271 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
272 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
273 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
274 keymap or nil. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
275 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
276 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
277 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
278 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
279 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
280 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
281 alias. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
282 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
283 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
284 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
285 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
286 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
287 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
288 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
289 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
290 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
291 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
292 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
293 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
294 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
295 `http://www.vtw.org/'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
296 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
297 ** A note about C mode indentation customization. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
298 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
299 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
300 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
301 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
302 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
303 chapter of the manual for details. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
304 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
305 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
306 customization variables take effect. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
307 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
308 ** Marking with the mouse. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
309 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
310 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
311 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
312 using M-x transient-mark-mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
313 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
314 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
315 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
316 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
317 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
318 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
319 to work on NT only and not on 95.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
320 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
321 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
322 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
323 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
324 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
325 applications, these problems are significant. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
326 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
327 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
328 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
329 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
330 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
331 other DOS application as a subprocess. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
332 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
333 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
334 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
335 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
336 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
337 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
338 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
339 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
340 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
341 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
342 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
343 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
344 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
345 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
346 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
347 minibuffer contains. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
348 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
349 ** `title' frame parameter and resource. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
350 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
351 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
352 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
353 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
354 affects just the displayed title of the frame. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
355 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
356 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
357 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
358 and also serves as the default for the displayed title |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
359 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
360 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
361 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
362 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
363 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
364 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
365 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
366 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
367 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
368 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
369 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
370 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
371 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
372 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
373 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
374 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
375 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
376 to replace the characters it "deletes". |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
377 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
378 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
379 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
380 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
381 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
382 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
383 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
384 immediately after the selected one. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
385 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
386 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
387 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
388 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
389 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
390 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
391 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
392 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
393 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
394 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
395 recover-session. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
396 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
397 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
398 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
399 will not work. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
400 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
401 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
402 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
403 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
404 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
405 now that the bug is fixed. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
406 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
407 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
408 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
409 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
410 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
411 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
412 which is dangerous and probably not what you want. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
413 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
414 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
415 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
416 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
417 the link is visited and a warning displayed. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
418 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
419 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
420 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
421 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
422 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
423 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
424 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
425 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
426 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
427 remain normal. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
428 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
429 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
430 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
431 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
432 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
433 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
434 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
435 Followup-To usually just holds one of those. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
436 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
437 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
438 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
439 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
440 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
441 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
442 `mail-directory-stream'.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
443 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
444 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
445 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
446 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
447 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
448 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
449 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
450 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
451 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
452 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
453 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
454 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
455 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
456 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
457 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
458 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
459 to a limitation in font-lock). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
460 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
461 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
462 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
463 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
464 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
465 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
466 this example: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
467 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
468 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
469 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
470 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
471 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
472 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
473 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
474 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
475 *** Font Lock mode is now supported. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
476 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
477 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
478 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
479 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
480 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
481 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
482 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
483 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
484 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
485 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
486 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
487 does the same job. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
488 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
489 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
490 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
491 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
492 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
493 text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
494 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
495 ** Font Lock mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
496 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
497 *** Global Font Lock mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
498 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
499 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
500 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
501 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
502 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
503 on globally where the buffer mode supports it. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
504 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
505 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
506 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
507 (global-font-lock-mode t) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
508 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
509 in your ~/.emacs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
510 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
511 *** Local Refontification |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
512 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
513 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
514 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
515 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
516 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
517 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
518 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
519 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
520 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
521 above and below point. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
522 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
523 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
524 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
525 ** Follow mode |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
526 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
527 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
528 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
529 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
530 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
531 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
532 follow-mode. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
533 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
534 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
535 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
536 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
537 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
538 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
539 ** hide-show changes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
540 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
541 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
542 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
543 normal hooks. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
544 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
545 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
546 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
547 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
548 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
549 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
550 those that begin a function, record, or macro. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
551 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
552 ** MSDOS Changes |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
553 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
554 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
555 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
556 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
557 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
558 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
559 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
560 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
561 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
562 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
563 pressing both mouse buttons. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
564 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
565 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
566 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
567 are: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
568 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
569 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
570 now works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
571 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
572 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
573 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
574 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
575 implementation of Emacs timers, see below). |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
576 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
577 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
578 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
579 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
580 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
581 **** `M-x recover-session' works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
582 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
583 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
584 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
585 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
586 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
587 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
588 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
589 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
590 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
591 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
592 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
593 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
594 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
595 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
596 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
597 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
598 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
599 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
600 be different. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
601 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
602 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
603 than `system-type'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
604 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
605 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
606 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
607 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
608 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
609 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
610 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
611 that pointed into or next to the deleted text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
612 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
613 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
614 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
615 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
616 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
617 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
618 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
619 like this: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
620 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
621 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
622 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
623 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
624 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
625 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
626 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
627 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
628 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
629 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
630 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
631 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
632 up if too much time passes. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
633 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
634 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
635 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
636 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
637 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
638 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
639 form in BODY. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
640 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
641 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
642 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
643 call looks like this: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
644 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
645 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
646 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
647 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
648 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
649 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
650 ARGS. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
651 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
652 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
653 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
654 command. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
655 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
656 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
657 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
658 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
659 each time Emacs becomes idle. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
660 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
661 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
662 idle for SECS seconds. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
663 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
664 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
665 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
666 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
667 instead. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
668 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
669 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
670 there is no answer within a certain time. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
671 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
672 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
673 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
674 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
675 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
676 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
677 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
678 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
679 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
680 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
681 arguments in between are ignored. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
682 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
683 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
684 the list of arguments for `encode-time'. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
685 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
686 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
687 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
688 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
689 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
690 version. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
691 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
692 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
693 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
694 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
695 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
696 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
697 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
698 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
699 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
700 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
701 systems with limited file name syntax. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
702 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
703 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
704 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
705 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
706 completions.el: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
707 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
708 (defvar save-completions-file-name |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
709 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
710 "*The filename to save completions to.") |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
711 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
712 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
713 depends on the operating system, because the definition of |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
714 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
715 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
716 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
717 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
718 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
719 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
720 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
721 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
722 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
723 marker from its buffer position. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
724 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
725 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
726 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
727 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
728 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
729 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
730 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
731 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
732 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
733 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
734 regardless of the value of debug-on-error. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
735 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
736 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
737 errors that happen often during editing. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
738 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
739 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
740 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
741 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
742 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
743 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
744 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
745 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
746 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
747 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
748 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
749 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
750 and not get-buffer-window. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
751 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
752 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
753 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
754 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
755 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
756 If you use this feature, you should set the variable |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
757 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
758 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
759 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
760 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
761 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
762 over and over for the same text. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
763 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
764 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
765 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
766 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
767 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
768 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
769 ;; @(#) HEADER: text |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
770 ;; $HEADER: text $ |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
771 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
772 in addition to the normal |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
773 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
774 ;; HEADER: text |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
775 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
776 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
777 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
778 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
779 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
780 |
061a65fa5a43
Move 19.x news from NEWS here.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
33644
diff
changeset
|
781 |
25853 | 782 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.30. |
783 | |
784 ** Be sure to recompile your byte-compiled Emacs Lisp files | |
785 if you last compiled them with Emacs 19.28 or earlier. | |
786 You can use M-x byte-force-recompile to recompile all the .elc files | |
787 in a specified directory. | |
788 | |
789 ** Emacs now provides multiple-frame support on Windows NT | |
790 and Windows 95. | |
791 | |
792 ** M-x column-number-mode toggles a minor mode which displays | |
793 the current column number in the mode line. | |
794 | |
795 ** Line Number mode is now enabled by default. | |
796 | |
797 ** M-x what-line now displays the line number in the accessible | |
798 portion of the buffer as well as the line number in the full buffer, | |
799 when narrowing is in effect. | |
800 | |
801 ** If you type a M-x command that has an equivalent key binding, | |
802 the equivalent is shown in the minibuffer before the command executes. | |
803 This feature is enabled by default for the sake of beginning users. | |
804 You can turn the feature off by setting suggest-key-bindings to nil. | |
805 | |
806 ** The menu bar is now visible on text-only terminals. To choose a | |
807 command from the menu bar when you have no mouse, type M-` | |
808 (Meta-Backquote) or F10. To turn off menu bar display, | |
809 do (menu-bar-mode -1). | |
810 | |
811 ** Whenever you invoke a minibuffer, it appears in the minibuffer | |
812 window that the current frame uses. | |
813 | |
814 Emacs can only use one minibuffer window at a time. If you activate | |
815 the minibuffer while a minibuffer window is active in some other | |
816 frame, the outer minibuffer window disappears while the inner one is | |
817 active. | |
818 | |
819 ** Echo area messages always appear in the minibuffer window that the | |
820 current frame uses. If a minibuffer is active in some other frame, | |
821 the echo area message does not hide it even temporarily. | |
822 | |
823 ** The minibuffer now has a menu-bar menu. You can use it to exit or | |
824 abort the minibuffer, or to ask for completion. | |
825 | |
826 ** Dead-key and composite character processing is done in the standard | |
827 X11R6 manner (through the default "input method" using the | |
828 /usr/lib/X11/locale/*/Compose databases of key combinations). I.e. if | |
829 it works in xterm, it should also work in emacs now. | |
830 | |
831 ** Mouse changes | |
832 | |
833 *** You can now use the mouse when running Emacs in an xterm. | |
834 Use M-x xterm-mouse-mode to let emacs take control over the mouse. | |
835 | |
836 *** C-mouse-1 now once again provides a menu of buffers to select. | |
837 S-mouse-1 is now the way to select a default font for the frame. | |
838 | |
839 *** There is a new mouse-scroll-min-lines variable to control the | |
840 minimum number of lines scrolled by dragging the mouse outside a | |
841 window's edge. | |
842 | |
843 *** Dragging mouse-1 on a vertical line that separates windows | |
844 now moves the line, thus changing the widths of the two windows. | |
845 (This feature is available only if you don't have vertical scroll bars. | |
846 If you do use them, a scroll bar separates two side-by-side windows.) | |
847 | |
848 *** Double-click mouse-1 on a character with "symbol" syntax (such as | |
849 underscore, in C mode) selects the entire symbol surrounding that | |
850 character. (Double-click mouse-1 on a letter selects a whole word.) | |
851 | |
852 ** When incremental search wraps around to the beginning (or end) of | |
853 the buffer, if you keep on searching until you go past the original | |
854 starting point of the search, the echo area changes from "Wrapped" to | |
855 "Overwrapped". That tells you that you are revisiting matches that | |
856 you have already seen. | |
857 | |
858 ** Filling changes. | |
859 | |
860 *** If the variable colon-double-space is non-nil, the explicit fill | |
861 commands put two spaces after a colon. | |
862 | |
863 *** Auto-Fill mode now supports Adaptive Fill mode just as the | |
864 explicit fill commands do. The variable adaptive-fill-regexp | |
865 specifies a regular expression to match text at the beginning of | |
866 a line that should be the fill prefix. | |
867 | |
868 *** Adaptive Fill mode can take a fill prefix from the first line of a | |
869 paragraph, *provided* that line is not a paragraph-starter line. | |
870 | |
871 Paragraph-starter lines are indented lines that start a new | |
872 paragraph because they are indented. This indentation shouldn't | |
873 be copied to additional lines. | |
874 | |
875 Whether indented lines are paragraph lines depends on the value of the | |
876 variable paragraph-start. Some major modes set this; you can set it | |
877 by hand or in mode hooks as well. For editing text in which paragraph | |
878 first lines are not indented, and which contains paragraphs in which | |
879 all lines are indented, you should use Indented Text mode or arrange | |
880 for paragraph-start not to match these lines. | |
881 | |
882 *** You can specify more complex ways of choosing a fill prefix | |
883 automatically by setting `adaptive-fill-function'. This function | |
884 is called with point after the left margin of a line, and it should | |
885 return the appropriate fill prefix based on that line. | |
886 If it returns nil, that means it sees no fill prefix in that line. | |
887 | |
888 ** Gnus changes. | |
889 | |
890 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has been rewritten and expanded. Most | |
891 things that worked with the old version should still work with the new | |
892 version. Code that relies heavily on Gnus internals is likely to | |
893 fail, though. | |
894 | |
895 *** Incompatibilities with the old GNUS. | |
896 | |
897 **** All interactive commands have kept their names, but many internal | |
898 functions have changed names. | |
899 | |
900 **** The summary mode gnus-uu commands have been moved from the `C-c | |
901 C-v' keymap to the `X' keymap. | |
902 | |
903 **** There can now be several summary buffers active at once. | |
904 Variables that are relevant to each summary buffer are buffer-local to | |
905 that buffer. | |
906 | |
907 **** Old hilit code doesn't work at all. Gnus performs its own | |
908 highlighting based not only on what's visible in the buffer, but on | |
909 other data structures. | |
910 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
911 **** Old packages like `expire-kill' will no longer work. |
25853 | 912 |
913 **** `C-c C-l' in the group buffer no longer switches to a different | |
914 buffer, but instead lists killed groups in the group buffer. | |
915 | |
916 *** New features. | |
917 | |
918 **** The look of all buffers can be changed by setting format-like | |
919 variables. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
920 |
25853 | 921 **** Local spool and several NNTP servers can be used at once. |
922 | |
923 **** Groups can be combined into virtual groups. | |
924 | |
925 **** Different mail formats can be read much the same way as one would | |
926 read newsgroups. All the mail backends implement mail expiry schemes. | |
927 | |
928 **** Gnus can use various strategies for gathering threads that have | |
929 lost their roots (thereby gathering loose sub-threads into one thread) | |
930 or it can go back and retrieve enough headers to build a complete | |
931 thread. | |
932 | |
933 **** Killed groups can be read. | |
934 | |
935 **** Gnus can do partial group updates - you do not have to retrieve | |
936 the entire active file just to check for new articles in a few groups. | |
937 | |
938 **** Gnus implements a sliding scale of subscribedness to groups. | |
939 | |
940 **** You can score articles according to any number of criteria. You | |
941 can get Gnus to score articles for you using adaptive scoring. | |
942 | |
943 **** Gnus maintains a dribble buffer that is auto-saved the normal | |
944 Emacs manner, so it should be difficult to lose much data on what you | |
945 have read if your machine should go down. | |
946 | |
947 **** Gnus now has its own startup file (`.gnus.el') to avoid | |
948 cluttering up the `.emacs' file. | |
949 | |
950 **** You can set the process mark on both groups and articles and | |
951 perform operations on all the marked items. | |
952 | |
953 **** You can grep through a subset of groups and create a group from | |
954 the results. | |
955 | |
956 **** You can list subsets of groups using matches on group names or | |
957 group descriptions. | |
958 | |
959 **** You can browse foreign servers and subscribe to groups from those | |
960 servers. | |
961 | |
962 **** Gnus can pre-fetch articles asynchronously on a second connection | |
963 to the servers. | |
964 | |
965 **** You can cache articles locally. | |
966 | |
967 **** Gnus can fetch FAQs to and descriptions of groups. | |
968 | |
969 **** Digests (and other files) can be used as the basis for groups. | |
970 | |
971 **** Articles can be highlighted and customized. | |
972 | |
973 ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
974 | |
975 *** General changes (all backends). | |
976 | |
977 VC directory listings (C-x v d) are now kept up to date when you do a | |
978 vc-next-action (C-x v v) on the marked files. The `g' command updates | |
979 the buffer properly. `=' in a VC dired buffer produces a version | |
980 control diff, not an ordinary diff. | |
981 | |
982 *** CVS changes. | |
983 | |
984 Under CVS, you no longer need to type C-x C-q before you can edit a | |
985 file. VC doesn't write-protect unmodified buffers anymore; you can | |
986 freely change them at any time. The mode line keeps track of the | |
987 file status. | |
988 | |
989 If you do want unmodified files to be write-protected, set your | |
990 CVSREAD environment variable. VC sees this and behaves accordingly; | |
46989 | 991 that will give you the behavior of Emacs 19.29, similar to that under |
25853 | 992 RCS and SCCS. In this mode, if the variable vc-mistrust-permissions |
993 is nil, VC learns the modification state from the file permissions. | |
994 When setting CVSREAD for the first time, you should check out the | |
995 whole module anew, so that the file permissions are set correctly. | |
996 | |
997 VC also works with remote repositories now. When you visit a file, it | |
998 doesn't run "cvs status" anymore, so there shouldn't be any long delays. | |
999 | |
1000 Directory listings under VC/CVS have been enhanced. Type C-x v d, and | |
1001 you get a list of all files in or below the current directory that are | |
1002 not up-to-date. The actual status (modified, merge, conflict, ...) is | |
1003 displayed for each file. If you give a prefix argument (C-u C-x v d), | |
1004 up-to-date files are also listed. You can mark any number of files, | |
1005 and execute the next logical version control command on them (C-x v v). | |
1006 | |
1007 *** Starting a new branch. | |
1008 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1009 If you try to lock a version that is not the latest on its branch, |
25853 | 1010 VC asks for confirmation in the minibuffer. If you say no, it offers |
1011 to lock the latest version instead. | |
1012 | |
1013 *** RCS non-strict locking. | |
1014 | |
1015 VC can now handle RCS non-strict locking, too. In this mode, working | |
1016 files are always writable and you needn't lock the file before making | |
1017 changes, similar to the default mode under CVS. To enable non-strict | |
1018 locking for a file, use the "rcs -U" command. | |
1019 | |
1020 *** Sharing RCS master files. | |
1021 | |
1022 If you share RCS subdirs with other users (through symbolic links), | |
1023 and you always want to work on the latest version, set | |
1024 vc-consult-headers to nil and vc-mistrust-permissions to `t'. | |
1025 Then you see the state of the *latest* version on the mode line, not | |
1026 that of your working file. When you do a check out, VC overwrites | |
1027 your working file with the latest version from the master. | |
1028 | |
1029 *** RCS customization. | |
1030 | |
1031 There is a new variable vc-consult-headers. If it is t (the default), | |
52401 | 1032 VC searches for RCS headers in working files (like `$Id: ONEWS,v 1.8 2003/02/04 14:30:40 lektu Exp $') and |
25853 | 1033 determines the state of the file from them, not from the master file. |
1034 This is fast and more reliable when you use branches. (The variable | |
1035 was already present in Emacs 19.29, but didn't get mentioned in the | |
1036 NEWS.) | |
1037 | |
1038 ** Calendar changes. | |
1039 | |
1040 *** New calendars supported: Chinese, Coptic, Ethiopic | |
1041 | |
1042 Here are the commands for converting to and from these calendars: | |
1043 | |
1044 gC: calendar-goto-chinese-date | |
1045 gk: calendar-goto-coptic-date | |
1046 ge: calendar-goto-ethiopic-date | |
1047 | |
1048 pC: calendar-print-chinese-date | |
1049 pk: calendar-print-coptic-date | |
1050 pe: calendar-print-ethiopic-date | |
1051 | |
1052 *** Printed calendars | |
1053 | |
1054 Calendar mode now has commands to produce fancy printed calendars via | |
1055 LaTeX. You can ask for a calendar for one or more days, weeks, months | |
1056 or years. The commands all start with `t'; see the manual for a list | |
1057 of them. | |
1058 | |
1059 *** New sexp diary entry type | |
1060 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1061 Reminders that apply in the days leading up to an event. |
25853 | 1062 |
1063 ** The CC-mode package now provides the default C and C++ modes. | |
1064 See the manual for documentation of its features. | |
1065 | |
1066 ** The uniquify package chooses buffer names differently when you | |
1067 visit multiple files with the same name (in different directories). | |
1068 | |
1069 ** RMAIL now always uses the movemail program when it renames an | |
1070 inbox file, so that it can interlock properly with the mailer | |
1071 no matter where it is delivering mail. | |
1072 | |
1073 ** tex-start-of-header and tex-end-of-header are now regular expressions, | |
1074 not strings. | |
1075 | |
1076 ** To enable automatic uncompression of compressed files, | |
1077 type M-x auto-compression-mode. (This command used to be called | |
1078 toggle-auto-compression, but was not documented before.) In Lisp, | |
1079 you can do | |
1080 | |
1081 (auto-compression-mode 1) | |
1082 | |
1083 to turn the mode on. | |
1084 | |
1085 ** The new pc-select package emulates the key bindings for cutting and | |
1086 pasting, and selection of regions, found in Windows, Motif, and the | |
1087 Macintosh. | |
1088 | |
1089 ** Help buffers now use a special major mode, Help mode. This mode | |
1090 normally turns on View mode; it also provides a hook, help-mode-hook, | |
1091 which you can use for other customization. | |
1092 | |
1093 ** Apropos now uses faces for enhanced legibility. It now describes | |
1094 symbol properties as well as their function definitions and variable | |
1095 values. You can use Mouse-2 or RET to get more information about a | |
1096 function definition, variable, or property. | |
1097 | |
1098 ** Font Lock mode | |
1099 | |
1100 *** Supports Scheme, TCL and Help modes | |
1101 | |
1102 For example, to automatically turn on Font Lock mode in the *Help* | |
1103 buffer, put: | |
1104 | |
1105 (add-hook 'help-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
1106 | |
1107 in your ~/.emacs. | |
1108 | |
1109 *** Enhanced fontification | |
1110 | |
1111 The structure of font-lock-keywords is extended to allow "anchored" keywords. | |
1112 Typically, a keyword item of font-lock-keywords comprises a regexp to search | |
1113 for and information to specify how the regexp should be highlighted. However, | |
1114 the highlighting information is extended so that it can be another keyword | |
1115 item. This keyword item, its regexp and highlighting information, is processed | |
1116 before resuming with the keyword item of which it is part. | |
1117 | |
1118 For example, a typical keyword item might be: | |
1119 | |
1120 ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face)) | |
1121 | |
1122 which fontifies each occurrence of the discrete word "anchor" in the value of | |
1123 the variable anchor-face. However, the highlighting information can be used to | |
1124 fontify text that is anchored to the word "anchor". For example: | |
1125 | |
1126 ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face) ("\\=[ ,]*\\(item\\)" nil nil (1 item-face))) | |
1127 | |
1128 which fontifies each occurrence of "anchor" as above, but for each occurrence | |
1129 of "anchor", each occurrence of "item", in any following comma separated list, | |
1130 is fontified in the value of the variable item-face. Thus the "item" text is | |
1131 anchored to the "anchor" text. See the variable documentation for further | |
1132 information. | |
1133 | |
1134 This feature is used to extend the level and quality of fontification in a | |
1135 number of modes. For example, C/C++ modes now have level 3 decoration that | |
1136 includes the fontification of variable and function names in declaration lists. | |
1137 In this instance, the "anchor" described in the above example is a type or | |
1138 class name, and an "item" is a variable or function name. | |
1139 | |
1140 *** Fontification levels | |
1141 | |
1142 The variables font-lock-maximum-decoration and font-lock-maximum-size are | |
1143 extended to specify levels and sizes for specific modes. The variable | |
1144 font-lock-maximum-decoration specifies the preferred level of fontification for | |
1145 modes that provide multiple levels (typically from "subdued" to "gaudy"). The | |
1146 variable font-lock-maximum-size specifies the buffer size for which buffer | |
1147 fontification is suppressed when Font Lock mode is turned on (typically because | |
1148 it would take too long). | |
1149 | |
1150 These variables can now specify values for individual modes, by supplying | |
1151 lists of mode names and values. For example, to use the above mentioned level | |
1152 3 decoration for buffers in C/C++ modes, and default decoration otherwise, put: | |
1153 | |
1154 (setq font-lock-maximum-decoration '((c-mode . 3) (c++-mode . 3))) | |
1155 | |
1156 in your ~/.emacs. Maximum buffer size values for individual modes are | |
1157 specified in the same way with the variable font-lock-maximum-size. | |
1158 | |
1159 *** Font Lock configuration | |
1160 | |
1161 The mechanism to provide default settings for Font Lock mode are the variables | |
1162 font-lock-defaults and font-lock-maximum-decoration. Typically, you should | |
1163 only need to change the value of font-lock-maximum-decoration. However, to | |
1164 support Font Lock mode for buffers in modes that currently do not support Font | |
1165 Lock mode, you should set a buffer local value of font-lock-defaults for that | |
1166 mode, typically via its mode hook. | |
1167 | |
1168 These variables are used by Font Lock mode to set the values of the variables | |
1169 font-lock-keywords, font-lock-keywords-only, font-lock-syntax-table, | |
1170 font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function and font-lock-keywords-case-fold-search. | |
1171 | |
1172 You need not set these variables directly, and should not set them yourself | |
1173 since the underlining mechanism may change in future. | |
1174 | |
1175 ** Archive mode is now the default mode for various sorts of | |
1176 archive files (files whose names end with .arc, .lzh, .zip, and .zoo). | |
1177 | |
1178 ** You can automatically update the years in copyright notice by | |
1179 means of (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'copyright-update). | |
1180 Optionally it can update the GPL version as well. | |
1181 | |
1182 ** Scripts of various languages (Shell, AWK, Perl, makefiles ...) can | |
1183 be automatically provided with a magic number and be made executable | |
1184 by their respective modes under control of various user variables. | |
1185 The mode must call (executable-set-magic "perl") or | |
1186 (executable-set-magic "make" "-f"). The latter for example has no | |
1187 effect on [Mm]akefile. | |
1188 | |
1189 ** Shell script mode now supports over 15 different shells. The new | |
1190 command C-c ! executes the region, and optionally beginning of script | |
1191 as well, by passing them to the shell. | |
1192 | |
1193 Cases such as `sh' being a `bash' are now accounted for. | |
1194 Fontification now also does variables, the magic number and all | |
1195 builtin commands. Shell script mode no longer mingles `tab-width' and | |
1196 indentation style. The variable `sh-tab-width' has been renamed to | |
1197 `sh-indentation'. Empty lines are now indented like previous | |
1198 non-empty line, rather than just previous line. | |
1199 | |
1200 The annoying $ variable prompting has been eliminated. Instead, shell | |
1201 script mode uses `comint-dynamic-completion' for commands, variables | |
1202 and filenames. | |
1203 | |
1204 ** Two-column mode now automatically scrolls both buffers together, | |
1205 which makes it possible to eliminate the special scrolling commands | |
1206 that used to do so. | |
1207 | |
1208 The commands that operate in two-column mode are no longer bound to | |
1209 keys outside that mode. f2 o will now position at the same point in | |
1210 associated buffer. | |
1211 | |
1212 the new command f2 RET inserts a newline in both buffers, at point and | |
1213 at the corresponding position in the associated buffer. | |
1214 | |
1215 ** Skeleton commands now work smoothly as abbrev definitions. The | |
1216 element < no longer exists, ' is a new element. | |
1217 | |
1218 ** The autoinsert insert facility for prefilling empty files as soon | |
1219 as they are found has been extended to accommodate skeletons or calling | |
1220 functions. See the function auto-insert. | |
1221 | |
1222 ** TPU-edt Changes | |
1223 | |
1224 Loading tpu-edt no longer turns on tpu-edt mode. In fact, it is no | |
1225 longer necessary to explicitly load tpu-edt. All you need to do to | |
1226 turn on tpu-edt is run the tpu-edt function. Here's how to run | |
1227 tpu-edt instead of loading the file: | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1228 |
25853 | 1229 Running Emacs: Type emacs -f tpu-edt |
1230 not emacs -l tpu-edt | |
1231 | |
1232 Within Emacs: Type M-x tpu-edt <ret> | |
1233 not M-x load-library <ret> tpu-edt <ret> | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1234 |
25853 | 1235 In .emacs: Use (tpu-edt) |
1236 not (load "tpu-edt") | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1237 |
25853 | 1238 The default name of the tpu-edt X key definition file has changed from |
1239 ~/.tpu-gnu-keys to ~/.tpu-keys. If you don't rename the file yourself, | |
1240 tpu-edt will offer to rename it the first time you invoke it under | |
1241 x-windows. | |
1242 | |
1243 ** MS-DOS Enhancements: | |
1244 | |
1245 *** Better mouse control by adding the following functions [in dosfns.c] | |
1246 msdos-mouse-enable, msdos-mouse-disable, msdos-mouse-init. | |
1247 | |
1248 *** If another foreground/background color than the default is setup in | |
1249 your ~/_emacs, then the screen briefly flickers with the default | |
1250 colors before changing to the colors you have specified. To avoid | |
1251 this, the EMACSCOLORS environment variable exists. It shall be | |
1252 defined as a string with the following elements: | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1253 |
25853 | 1254 set EMACSCOLORS=fb;fb |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1255 |
25853 | 1256 The first set of "fb" defines the initial foreground and background |
1257 colors using standard dos color numbers (0=black,.., 7=white). | |
1258 If specified, the second set of "fb" defines the colors which are | |
1259 restored when you leave emacs. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1260 |
25853 | 1261 *** The new SUSPEND environment variable can now be set as the shell to |
1262 use when suspending emacs. This can be used to override the stupid | |
1263 limitation on the environment of sub-shells in MS-DOS (they are just | |
1264 large enough to hold the currently defined variables, not leaving | |
1265 room for more); to overcome this limitation, add this to autoexec.bat: | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1266 |
25853 | 1267 set SUSPEND=%COMSPEC% /E:2000 |
1268 | |
1269 ** The escape character can now be displayed on X frames. Try | |
1270 this: | |
1271 (aset standard-display-table 27 (vector 27)) | |
1272 after first creating a display table (you can do that by loading | |
1273 the disp-table library). | |
1274 | |
1275 ** The new command-line option --eval specifies an expression to evaluate | |
1276 from the command line. | |
1277 | |
1278 ** etags has now the ability to tag Perl files. They are recognised | |
1279 either by the .pm and .pl suffixes or by a first line which starts | |
1280 with `#!' and specifies a Perl interpreter. The tagged lines are | |
1281 those beginning with the `sub' keyword. | |
1282 | |
1283 New suffixes recognised are .hpp for C++; .f90 for Fortran; .bib, | |
1284 .ltx, .TeX for TeX (.bbl, .dtx removed); .ml for Lisp; .prolog for | |
1285 prolog (.pl is now Perl). | |
1286 | |
1287 ** The files etc/termcap.dat and etc/termcap.ucb have been replaced | |
1288 with a new, merged, and much more comprehensive termcap file. The | |
1289 new file should include all the special entries from the old one. | |
1290 This new file is under active development as part of the ncurses | |
1291 project. If you have any questions about this file, or problems with | |
1292 an entry in it, email terminfo@ccil.org. | |
1293 | |
1294 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.30. | |
1295 | |
1296 ** New Data Types | |
1297 | |
1298 *** There is a new data type called a char-table which is an array | |
1299 indexed by a character. Currently this is mostly equivalent to a | |
1300 vector of length 256, but in the future, when a wider character set is | |
1301 in use, it will be different. To create one, call | |
1302 (make-char-table SUBTYPE INITIAL-VALUE) | |
1303 | |
1304 SUBTYPE is a symbol that identifies the specific use of this | |
1305 character table. It can be any of these values: | |
1306 | |
1307 syntax-table | |
1308 display-table | |
1309 keyboard-translate-table | |
1310 case-table | |
1311 | |
1312 The function `char-table-subtype' returns the subtype of a char-table. | |
1313 You cannot alter the subtype of an existing char-table. | |
1314 | |
1315 A char-table has an element for each character code. It also has some | |
1316 "extra slots". The number of extra slots depends on the subtype and | |
1317 their use depends on the subtype. (Each subtype symbol has a | |
1318 `char-table-extra-slots' property that says how many extra slots to | |
1319 make.) Use (char-table-extra-slot TABLE N) to access extra slot N and | |
1320 (set-char-table-extra-slot TABLE N VALUE) to store VALUE in slot N. | |
1321 | |
1322 A char-table T can have a parent, which should be another char-table | |
1323 P. If you look for the value in T for character C, and the table T | |
1324 actually holds nil, P's element for character C is used instead. | |
1325 The functions `char-table-parent' and `set-char-table-parent' | |
1326 let you read or set the parent of a char-table. | |
1327 | |
1328 To scan all the values in a char-table, do not try to loop through all | |
1329 possible character codes. That would work for now, but will not work | |
1330 in the future. Instead, call map-char-table. (map-char-table | |
1331 FUNCTION TABLE) calls FUNCTION once for each character or character | |
1332 set that has a distinct value in TABLE. FUNCTION gets two arguments, | |
1333 RANGE and VALUE. RANGE specifies a range of TABLE that has one | |
1334 uniform value, and VALUE is the value in TABLE for that range. | |
1335 | |
1336 Currently, RANGE is always a vector containing a single character | |
1337 and it refers to that character alone. In the future, other kinds | |
1338 of ranges will occur. You can set the value for a given range | |
1339 with (set-char-table-range TABLE RANGE VALUE) and examine the value | |
1340 for a range with (char-table-range TABLE RANGE). | |
1341 | |
1342 *** Syntax tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1343 All syntax tables other than the standard syntax table | |
1344 normally have the standard syntax table as their parent. | |
1345 Their subtype is `syntax-table'. | |
1346 | |
1347 *** Display tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1348 Their subtype is `display-table'. | |
1349 | |
1350 *** Case tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1351 Their subtype is `case-table'. | |
1352 | |
1353 *** The value of keyboard-translate-table may now be a char-table | |
1354 instead of a string. Normally the char-tables used for this purpose | |
1355 have the subtype `keyboard-translate-table', but that is not required. | |
1356 | |
1357 *** A new data type called a bool-vector is a vector of values | |
1358 that are either t or nil. To create one, do | |
1359 (make-bool-vector LENGTH INITIAL-VALUE) | |
1360 | |
1361 ** You can now specify, for each marker, how it should relocate when | |
1362 text is inserted at the place where the marker points. This is called | |
1363 the "insertion type" of the marker. | |
1364 | |
1365 To set the insertion type, do (set-marker-insertion-type MARKER TYPE). | |
1366 If TYPE is t, it means the marker advances when text is inserted. If | |
1367 TYPE is nil, it means the marker does not advance. (In Emacs 19.29, | |
1368 markers did not advance.) | |
1369 | |
1370 The function marker-insertion-type reports the insertion type of a | |
1371 given marker. The function copy-marker takes a second argument TYPE | |
1372 which specifies the insertion type of the new copied marker. | |
1373 | |
1374 ** When you create an overlay, you can specify the insertion type of | |
1375 the beginning and of the end. To do this, you can use two new | |
1376 arguments to make-overlay: front-advance and rear-advance. | |
1377 | |
1378 ** The new function overlays-in returns a list of the overlays that | |
1379 overlap a specified range of the buffer. The returned list includes | |
1380 empty overlays at the beginning of this range, as well as within the | |
1381 range. | |
1382 | |
1383 ** The new hook window-scroll-functions is run when a window has been | |
1384 scrolled. The functions in this list are called just before | |
1385 redisplay, after the new window-start has been computed. Each function | |
1386 is called with two arguments--the window that has been scrolled, and its | |
1387 new window-start position. | |
1388 | |
1389 This hook is useful for on-the-fly fontification and other features | |
1390 that affect how the redisplayed text will look when it is displayed. | |
1391 | |
1392 The window-end value of the window is not valid when these functions | |
1393 are called. The computation of window-end is byproduct of actual | |
1394 redisplay of the window contents, which means it has not yet happened | |
1395 when the hook is run. Computing window-end specially in advance for | |
1396 the sake of these functions would cause a slowdown. | |
1397 | |
1398 The hook functions can determine where the text on the window will end | |
1399 by calling vertical-motion starting with the window-start position. | |
1400 | |
1401 ** The new hook redisplay-end-trigger-functions is run whenever | |
1402 redisplay in window uses text that extends past a specified end | |
1403 trigger position. You set the end trigger position with the function | |
1404 set-window-redisplay-end-trigger. The functions are called with two | |
1405 arguments: the window, and the end trigger position. Storing nil for | |
1406 the end trigger position turns off the feature, and the trigger value | |
1407 is automatically reset to nil just after the hook is run. | |
1408 | |
1409 You can use the function window-redisplay-end-trigger to read a | |
1410 window's current end trigger value. | |
1411 | |
1412 ** The new function insert-file-contents-literally inserts the | |
1413 contents of a file without any character set translation or decoding. | |
1414 | |
1415 ** The new function safe-length computes the length of a list. | |
1416 It never gets an error--it treats any non-list like nil. | |
1417 If given a circular list, it returns an upper bound for the number | |
1418 of elements before the circularity. | |
1419 | |
1420 ** replace-match now takes a fifth argument, SUBEXP. If SUBEXP is | |
1421 non-nil, that says to replace just subexpression number SUBEXP of the | |
1422 regexp that was matched, not the entire match. For example, after | |
1423 matching `foo \(ba*r\)' calling replace-match with 1 as SUBEXP means | |
1424 to replace just the text that matched `\(ba*r\)'. | |
1425 | |
1426 ** The new keymap special-event-map defines bindings for certain | |
1427 events that should be handled at a very low level--as soon as they | |
1428 are read. The read-event function processes these events itself, | |
1429 and never returns them. | |
1430 | |
1431 Events that are handled in this way do not echo, they are never | |
1432 grouped into key sequences, and they never appear in the value of | |
1433 last-command-event or (this-command-keys). They do not discard a | |
1434 numeric argument, they cannot be unread with unread-command-events, | |
1435 they may not appear in a keyboard macro, and they are not recorded | |
1436 in a keyboard macro while you are defining one. | |
1437 | |
1438 These events do, however, appear in last-input-event immediately after | |
1439 they are read, and this is the way for the event's definition to find | |
1440 the actual event. | |
1441 | |
1442 The events types iconify-frame, make-frame-visible and delete-frame | |
1443 are normally handled in this way. | |
1444 | |
1445 ** encode-time now supports simple date arithmetic by means of | |
1446 out-of-range values for its SEC, MINUTE, HOUR, DAY, and MONTH | |
1447 arguments; for example, day 0 means the day preceding the given month. | |
1448 Also, the ZONE argument can now be a TZ-style string. | |
1449 | |
1450 ** command-execute and call-interactively now accept an optional third | |
1451 argument KEYS. If specified and non-nil, this specifies the key | |
1452 sequence containing the events that were used to invoke the command. | |
1453 | |
1454 ** The environment variable NAME, if set, now specifies the value of | |
1455 (user-full-name), when Emacs starts up. | |
1456 | |
1457 * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
1458 | |
1459 ** If you run out of memory. | |
1460 | |
1461 If you get the error message "Virtual memory exhausted", type C-x s. | |
1462 That way of saving files has the least additional memory needs. Emacs | |
1463 19.29 keeps a reserve of memory which it makes available when this | |
1464 error happens; that is to ensure that C-x s can complete its work. | |
1465 | |
1466 Once you have saved your data, you can exit and restart Emacs, or use | |
1467 M-x kill-some-buffers to free up space. If you kill buffers | |
1468 containing a substantial amount of text, you can go on editing. | |
1469 | |
1470 Do not use M-x buffer-menu to save or kill buffers when you are out of | |
1471 memory, because that needs a fair amount memory itself and you may not | |
1472 have enough to get it started. | |
1473 | |
1474 ** The format of compiled files has changed incompatibly. | |
1475 | |
1476 Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19.29 normally use a new format | |
1477 that will not work in older Emacs versions. You can compile files | |
1478 in the old format if you wish; see "Changes in compilation," below. | |
1479 | |
1480 ** Emacs 19.29 supports the DEC Alpha. | |
1481 | |
1482 ** Emacs runs on Windows NT. | |
1483 | |
1484 This port does not yet support windowing features. It works like a | |
1485 text-only terminal, but it does support a mouse. | |
1486 | |
1487 In general, support for non-GNU-like operating systems is not a high | |
1488 priority for the GNU project. We merged in the support for Windows NT | |
1489 because that system is expected to be very widely used. | |
1490 | |
1491 ** Emacs supports Motif widgets. | |
1492 | |
1493 You can build Emacs with Motif widgets by specifying --with-x-toolkit=motif | |
1494 when you run configure. | |
1495 | |
1496 Motif defines collections of windows called "tab groups", and uses the | |
1497 tab key and the cursor keys to move between windows in a tab group. | |
1498 Emacs naturally does not support this--it has other uses for the tab | |
1499 key and cursor keys. Emacs does not support Motif accelerators either, | |
1500 because it uses its normal keymap event binding features. | |
1501 | |
1502 We give higher priority to operation with a free widget set than to | |
1503 operation with a proprietary one. | |
1504 | |
1505 ** If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover all the files you | |
1506 were editing from their auto save files by typing M-x recover-session. | |
1507 This first shows you a list of recorded interrupted sessions. Move | |
1508 point to the one you choose, and type C-c C-c. | |
1509 | |
1510 Then recover-session asks about each of the files that were being | |
1511 edited during that session, asking whether to recover that file. If | |
1512 you answer y, it calls recover-file, which works in its normal | |
1513 fashion. It shows the dates of the original file and its auto-save | |
1514 file and asks once again whether to recover that file. | |
1515 | |
1516 When recover-session is done, the files you've chosen to recover | |
1517 are present in Emacs buffers. You should then save them. | |
1518 Only this--saving them--updates the files themselves. | |
1519 | |
1520 ** Menu bar menus now stay up if you click on the menu bar item and | |
1521 release the mouse button within a certain amount of time. This is in | |
1522 the X Toolkit version. | |
1523 | |
1524 ** The menu bar menus have been rearranged and split up to make for a | |
1525 better organization. Two new menu bar menus, Tools and Search, | |
1526 contain items that were formerly in the Files and Edit menus, as well | |
1527 as some that did not exist in the menu bar menus before. | |
1528 | |
1529 ** Emacs can now display on more than one X display at the same time. | |
1530 Use the command make-frame-on-display to create a frame, specifying | |
1531 which display to use. | |
1532 | |
1533 ** M-x talk-connect sets up a multi-user talk connection | |
1534 via Emacs. Specify the X display of the person you want to talk to. | |
1535 You can talk to any number of people (within reason) by using | |
1536 this command repeatedly to specify different people. | |
1537 | |
1538 Emacs does not make a fuss about security; the people who you talk to | |
1539 can use all Emacs features, including visiting and editing files. If | |
1540 this frightens you, don't use M-x talk-connect. | |
1541 | |
1542 ** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines. | |
1543 This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1, | |
1544 or 134,217,727. | |
1545 | |
1546 ** When you start Emacs, you can now specify option names in | |
1547 long GNU form (starting with `--') and you can abbreviate the names. | |
1548 | |
1549 You can now specify the options in any order. | |
1550 The previous requirements about the order of options | |
1551 have been eliminated. | |
1552 | |
1553 The -L or --directory option lets you specify an additional | |
1554 directory to search for Lisp libraries (including libraries | |
1555 that you specify with the -l or --load options). | |
1556 | |
1557 ** Incremental search in Transient Mark mode, if the mark is already | |
1558 active, now leaves the mark active and does not change its position. | |
1559 You can make incremental search deactivate the mark once again with | |
1560 this expression. | |
1561 | |
1562 (add-hook 'isearch-mode-hook 'deactivate-mark) | |
1563 | |
1564 ** C-delete now deletes a word backwards. This is for compatibility | |
1565 with some editors in the PC world. (This key is not available on | |
1566 ordinary ASCII terminals, because C-delete is not a distinct character | |
1567 on those terminals.) | |
1568 | |
1569 ** ESC ESC ESC is now a command to escape from various temporary modes | |
1570 and states. | |
1571 | |
1572 ** M-x pc-bindings-mode sets up bindings compatible with many PC editors. | |
1573 In particular, Delete and its variants delete forward instead of backward. | |
1574 Use Backspace to delete backward. | |
1575 | |
1576 C-Backspace kills backward a word (as C-Delete normally would). | |
1577 M-Backspace does undo. | |
1578 Home and End move to beginning and end of line | |
1579 C-Home and C-End move to beginning and end of buffer. | |
1580 | |
1581 ** The key sequence for evaluating a Lisp expression using the minibuffer | |
1582 is now ESC :. It used to be ESC ESC, but we moved it to make way for | |
1583 the ESC ESC ESC feature, on the grounds that people who evaluate Lisp | |
1584 expressions are experienced users and can cope with a change. | |
1585 If you prefer the old ESC ESC binding, put in your `~/.emacs': | |
1586 | |
1587 (global-set-key "\e\e" 'eval-expression) | |
1588 | |
1589 ** The f1 function key is now equivalent to the help key. This is | |
1590 done with key-translation-map; delete the binding for f1 in that map | |
1591 if you want to use f1 for something else. | |
1592 | |
1593 ** Mouse-3, in the simplest case, still sets the region. But now, it | |
1594 places the mark where point was, and sets point where you click. | |
1595 (It used to set the mark where you click and leave point alone.) | |
1596 | |
1597 If you position point with Mouse-1, then scroll with the scroll bar | |
1598 and use Mouse-3, Mouse-3 uses the position you specified with Mouse-1 | |
1599 even if it has scrolled off the screen (and point is no longer there). | |
1600 This makes it easier to select a region with the mouse which is bigger | |
1601 than a screenful. | |
1602 | |
1603 Any editing of the buffer, and any cursor motion or scrolling for any | |
1604 reason other than the scroll bar, cancels the special state set up by | |
1605 Mouse-1--so that a subsequent Mouse-3 click will use the actual value | |
1606 of point. | |
1607 | |
1608 ** C-mouse-3 now pops up a mode-specific menu of commands--normally | |
1609 the same ones available in the mode's own menu bar menus. | |
1610 | |
1611 ** C-mouse-2 now pops up a menu of faces, indentation, justification, | |
1612 and certain other text properties. This menu is also available | |
1613 through the menu-bar Edit menu. It is meant for use with Enriched | |
1614 mode. | |
1615 | |
1616 *** You can use this menu to change the face of the region. | |
1617 You can also set the face of the region with the new M-g command. | |
1618 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1619 *** The menu also includes commands for indenting the region, |
25853 | 1620 which locally changes the values of left-margin and fill-column that |
1621 are used. | |
1622 | |
1623 *** All fill functions now indent every line to the left-margin. If | |
1624 there is also a fill-prefix, that goes after the margin indentation. | |
1625 | |
1626 *** Open-line and newline also make sure that the lines they create | |
1627 are indented to the left margin. | |
1628 | |
1629 *** It also allows you to set the "justification" of the region: | |
1630 whether it should be centered, flush right, and so forth. The fill | |
1631 functions (including auto-fill-mode) will maintain the justification | |
1632 and indentation that you request. | |
1633 | |
1634 *** The new function `list-colors-display' shows you what colors are | |
1635 available. This is also accessible from the C-mouse-2 menu. | |
1636 | |
1637 ** You can now save and load files including their faces and other | |
1638 text-properties by using Enriched-mode. Files are saved in an | |
1639 extended version of the MIME text/enriched format. You can use the | |
1640 menus described above, or M-g and other keyboard commands, to | |
1641 alter the formatting information. | |
1642 | |
1643 ** C-mouse-1 now pops up the menu for changing the frame's default font. | |
1644 | |
1645 ** You can input Hyper, Super, Meta, and Alt characters, as well as | |
1646 non-ASCII control characters, on an ASCII-only terminal. | |
1647 To do this, use | |
1648 | |
1649 C-x @ h -- hyper | |
1650 C-x @ s -- super | |
1651 C-x @ m -- meta | |
1652 C-x @ a -- alt | |
1653 C-x @ S -- shift | |
1654 C-x @ c -- control | |
1655 | |
1656 These are not ordinary key sequences; they operate through | |
1657 function-key-map, which means they can be used even in the | |
1658 middle of an ordinary key sequence. | |
1659 | |
1660 ** Outline minor mode and Hideif mode now use C-c @ as their prefix | |
1661 character. | |
1662 | |
1663 ** Echo area messages are now logged in the "*Messages*" buffer. The | |
1664 size of this buffer is limited to message-log-max lines. | |
1665 | |
1666 ** RET in various special modes for read-only buffers that contain | |
1667 lists of items now selects the item point is on. These modes include | |
1668 Dired, Compilation buffers, Buffer-menu, Tar mode, and Occur mode. | |
1669 (In Info, RET follows the reference near point; in completion list | |
1670 buffers, RET chooses the completion around point.) | |
1671 | |
1672 ** set-background-color now updates the modeline face in a special | |
1673 way. If that face was previously set up to be reverse video, the | |
1674 reverse of the default face, then set-background-color updates it so | |
1675 that it remains the reverse of the default face. | |
1676 | |
1677 ** The functions raise-frame and lower-frame are now commands. | |
1678 When used interactively, they apply to the selected frame. | |
1679 | |
1680 ** M-x buffer-menu now displays the buffer list in the selected window. | |
1681 Use M-x buffer-menu-other-window to display it in another window. | |
1682 | |
1683 ** M-w followed by a kill command now *does not* append the text in | |
1684 the kill ring. In consequence, M-w followed by C-w works as you would | |
1685 expect: it leaves the top of the kill ring matching the region that | |
1686 you killed. | |
1687 | |
1688 ** In Lisp mode, the C-M-x command now executes defvar forms in a | |
1689 special way: it unconditionally sets the variable to the specified | |
1690 default value, if there is one. Normal execution of defvar does not | |
1691 alter the variable if it already has a non-void value. | |
1692 | |
1693 ** In completion list buffers, the left and right arrow keys run the | |
1694 new commands previous-completion and next-completion. They move one | |
1695 completion at a time. | |
1696 | |
1697 ** While doing completion in the minibuffer, the `prior' or `pageup' | |
1698 key switches to the completion list window. | |
1699 | |
1700 ** When you exit the minibuffer with empty contents, the empty string | |
1701 is not put in the minibuffer history. | |
1702 | |
1703 ** The default buffer for insert-buffer is now the "first" buffer | |
1704 other than the current one. If you have more than one window, this | |
1705 is a buffer visible in another window. (Usually it is the buffer | |
1706 that C-M-v would scroll.) | |
1707 | |
1708 ** The etags program is now capable of recording tags based on regular | |
1709 expressions provided on the command line. | |
1710 | |
1711 This new feature allows easy support for constructs not normally | |
1712 handled by etags, such as the macros frequently used in big C/C++ | |
1713 projects to define project-specific structures. It also enables the | |
1714 use of etags and TAGS files for languages not supported by etags. | |
1715 | |
1716 The Emacs manual section on Tags contains explanations and examples | |
1717 for Emacs's DEFVAR, VHDL, Cobol, Postscript and TCL. | |
1718 | |
1719 ** Various mode-specific commands that used to be bound to C-c LETTER | |
1720 have been moved. | |
1721 | |
1722 *** In gnus-uu mode, gnus-uu-interactive-scan-directory is now on C-c C-d, | |
1723 and gnus-uu-interactive-save-current-file is on C-c C-z. | |
1724 | |
1725 *** In Scribe mode, scribe-insert-environment is now on C-c C-v, | |
1726 scribe-chapter is on C-c C-c, scribe-subsection is on C-c C-s, | |
1727 scribe-section is on C-c C-t, scribe-bracket-region-be is on C-c C-e, | |
1728 scribe-italicize-word is on C-c C-i, scribe-bold-word is on C-c C-b, | |
1729 and scribe-underline-word is on C-c C-u. | |
1730 | |
1731 *** In Gomoku mode, gomoku-human-takes-back is now on C-c C-b, | |
1732 gomoku-human-plays is on C-c C-p, gomoku-human-resigns is on C-c C-r, | |
1733 and gomoku-emacs-plays is on C-c C-e. | |
1734 | |
1735 *** In the Outline mode defined in allout.el, | |
1736 outline-rebullet-current-heading is now on C-c *. | |
1737 | |
1738 ** M-s in Info now searches through the nodes of the Info file, | |
1739 just like s. The alias M-s was added so that you can use the same | |
1740 command for searches in both Info and Rmail. | |
1741 | |
1742 ** iso-acc.el now lets you enter inverted-! and inverted-? | |
1743 with the sequences ~! and ~?. | |
1744 | |
1745 ** M-x compare-windows now pushes mark in both windows before | |
1746 it starts moving point. | |
1747 | |
1748 ** There are two new commands in Dired, A (dired-do-search) | |
1749 and Q (dired-do-query-replace). These are similar to tags-search and | |
1750 tags-query-replace, but instead of searching the list of files that | |
1751 appears in a tags table, they search all the files marked in Dired. | |
1752 | |
1753 ** Changes to dabbrev. | |
1754 | |
1755 A new function, `dabbrev-completion' (bound to M-C-/), expands the | |
1756 unique part of an abbreviation. | |
1757 | |
1758 Dabbrev now looks for expansions in other buffers, looks for symbols | |
1759 instead of words and it works in the minibuffer. | |
1760 | |
1761 Dabbrev can be customized to work for shell scripts, with variables | |
1762 that sometimes have and sometimes haven't a leading "$". See the | |
1763 variable 'dabbrev-abbrev-skip-leading-regexp'. | |
1764 | |
1765 ** In Rmail, the command rmail-input-menu has been eliminated. The | |
1766 feature of selecting an Rmail file from a menu is now implemented in | |
1767 another way. | |
1768 | |
1769 ** Bookmarks changes. | |
1770 | |
1771 *** It now works to set bookmarks in Info nodes. | |
1772 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1773 *** Bookmarks can have annotations; type "C-h m" after doing |
25853 | 1774 "M-x list-bookmarks", for more information on annotations. |
1775 | |
1776 *** The bookmark-jump popup menu function is now `bookmark-menu-jump', for | |
1777 those who bind it to a mouse click. | |
1778 | |
1779 *** The default bookmarks file name is now "~/.emacs.bmk". If you | |
1780 already have a bookmarks file, it will be renamed automagically when | |
1781 you next load it. | |
1782 | |
1783 ** New package, ps-print. | |
1784 | |
1785 The ps-print package generates PostScript printouts of buffers or | |
1786 regions, and includes face attributes such as color, underlining, | |
1787 boldface and italics in the printed output. | |
1788 | |
1789 ** New package, msb. | |
1790 | |
1791 The msb package provides a buffer-menu in the menubar with separate | |
1792 menus for different types of buffers. | |
1793 | |
1794 ** `cpp.el' is a new library that can highlight or hide parts of a C | |
1795 file according to C preprocessor conditionals. To try it, run the | |
1796 command M-x cpp-highlight-buffer. | |
1797 | |
1798 ** Changes in CC mode. | |
1799 | |
1800 *** c-set-offset and related functions and variables can now accept | |
1801 variable symbols. Also ++ and -- which mean 2* positive and negative | |
1802 c-basic-offset respectively. | |
1803 | |
1804 *** New variable, c-recognize-knr-p, which controls whether K&R C | |
1805 constructs will be recognized. Trying to recognize K&R constructs is a | |
1806 time hog so if you're programming strictly in ANSI C, set this | |
1807 variable to nil (it should already be nil in c++-mode). | |
1808 | |
1809 *** New variable, c-hanging-comment-ender-p for controlling | |
1810 c-fill-paragraph's behavior. | |
1811 | |
1812 *** New syntactic symbol: statement-case-open. This is assigned to lines | |
1813 containing an open brace just after a case/default label. | |
1814 | |
1815 *** New variable, c-progress-interval, which controls minibuffer update | |
1816 message displays during long re-indention. This is a new feature | |
1817 which prints percentage complete messages at specified intervals. | |
1818 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
1819 ** Makefile mode changes. |
25853 | 1820 |
1821 *** The electric keys are not enabled by default. | |
1822 | |
1823 *** There is now a mode-specific menu bar menu. | |
1824 | |
1825 *** The mode supports font-lock, add-log, and imenu. | |
1826 | |
1827 *** The command M-TAB does completion of target names and variable names. | |
1828 | |
1829 ** icomplete.el now works more like a minor mode. Use M-x icomplete-mode | |
1830 to turn it on and off. | |
1831 | |
1832 Icomplete now supports an `icomplete-minibuffer-setup-hook', which is | |
1833 run on minibuffer setup whenever icompletion will be occurring. This | |
1834 hook can be used to customize interoperation of icomplete with other | |
1835 minibuffer-specific packages, eg rsz-mini. See the doc string for | |
1836 more info. | |
1837 | |
1838 ** Ediff change. | |
1839 | |
1840 Use ediff-revision instead of vc-ediff. It also replaces rcs-ediff, | |
1841 for those who use that; if you want to use a version control package | |
1842 other than vc.el, you must set the variable | |
1843 ediff-version-control-package to specify which package. | |
1844 | |
1845 ** VC now supports branches with RCS. | |
1846 | |
1847 You can use C-u C-x C-q to select any branch or version by number. | |
1848 It reads the version number or branch number with the minibuffer, | |
1849 then checks out the file unlocked. | |
1850 | |
1851 Type C-x C-q again to lock the selected branch or version. | |
1852 When you check in changes to that branch or version, there are two | |
1853 possibilities: | |
1854 | |
1855 -- If you've selected a branch, or a version at the tip of a branch, | |
1856 then the new version adds to that branch. If you wish to create a | |
1857 new branch, use C-u C-x C-q to specify a version number when you check | |
1858 in the new version. | |
1859 | |
1860 -- If you've selected an inner version which is not the latest in its | |
1861 branch, then the new version automatically creates a new branch. | |
1862 | |
1863 ** VC now supports CVS as well as RCS and SCCS. | |
1864 | |
1865 Since there are no locks in CVS, some things behave slightly | |
1866 different when the backend is CVS. When vc-next-action is invoked | |
1867 in a directory handled by CVS, it does the following: | |
1868 | |
1869 If the file is not already registered, this registers it for version | |
1870 control. This does a "cvs add", but no "cvs commit". | |
1871 If the file is added but not committed, it is committed. | |
1872 If the file has not been changed, neither in your working area or | |
1873 in the repository, a message is printed and nothing is done. | |
1874 If your working file is changed, but the repository file is | |
1875 unchanged, this pops up a buffer for entry of a log message; when you | |
1876 finish the log message with C-c C-c, that checks in the resulting | |
1877 changes along with the log message as change commentary. A writable | |
1878 file remains in existence. | |
1879 | |
1880 If vc-next-action changes the repository file, it asks you | |
1881 whether to merge in the changes into your working copy. | |
1882 | |
1883 vc-directory, when started in a CVS file hierarchy, reports | |
1884 all files that are modified (and thus need to be committed). | |
1885 (When the backend is RCS or SCCS vc-directory reports all | |
1886 locked files). | |
1887 | |
1888 VC has no support for running the initial "cvs checkout" to get a | |
1889 working copy of a module. You can only use VC in a working copy of | |
1890 a module. | |
1891 | |
1892 You can disable the CVS support as follows: | |
1893 | |
1894 (setq vc-master-templates (delq 'vc-find-cvs-master vc-master-templates)) | |
1895 | |
1896 or by setting vc-handle-cvs to nil. | |
1897 | |
1898 This may be desirable if you run a non-standard version of CVS, or | |
1899 if CVS was compiled with FORCE_USE_EDITOR or (possibly) | |
1900 RELATIVE_REPOS. | |
1901 | |
1902 ** Comint and shell mode changes: | |
1903 | |
1904 *** Completion works with file names containing quoted characters. | |
1905 | |
1906 File names containing special characters (such as " ", "!", etc.) that are | |
1907 quoted with a "\" character are recognised during completion. Special | |
1908 characters are quoted when they are inserted during completion. | |
1909 | |
1910 *** You can use M-x comint-truncate-buffer to truncate the buffer. | |
1911 | |
1912 When this command is run, the buffer is truncated to a maximum number | |
1913 of lines, specified by the variable comint-buffer-maximum-size. Just | |
1914 like the command comint-strip-ctrl-m, this can be run automatically | |
1915 during process output by doing this: | |
1916 | |
1917 (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions | |
1918 'comint-truncate-buffer) | |
1919 | |
1920 ** Telnet mode buffer name changed. | |
1921 | |
1922 The buffer name for a Telnet buffer is now *telnet-HOST*, not | |
1923 *HOST-telnet*. This is for consistency with other Emacs packages. | |
1924 | |
1925 ** M-x man (man) is now faster and more robust. On systems where the | |
1926 entire man page is indented, the indentation is removed. | |
1927 | |
1928 The user option names that used to end in -p now end in -flag. The | |
1929 new names are: Man-reuse-okay-flag, Man-downcase-section-letters-flag, | |
1930 Man-circular-pages-flag. The Man-notify user option has been renamed to | |
1931 Man-notify-method and accepts one more value, `pushy', that just | |
1932 switches the current buffer to the manpage buffer, without switching | |
1933 frames nor changing your windows configuration. | |
1934 | |
1935 A new user option Man-fontify-manpage-flag disables fontification | |
1936 (thus speeding up man) when set to nil. Default is to fontify if a | |
1937 window system is used. Two new user options Man-overstrike-face | |
1938 (default 'bold) and Man-underline-face (default 'underline) can be set | |
1939 to the preferred faces to be used for the words that man overstrikes | |
1940 and underlines. Useful for those who like coloured man pages. | |
1941 | |
1942 Two new interactive functions are provided: Man-cleanup-manpage and | |
1943 Man-fontify-manpage. Both can be used on a buffer that contains the | |
1944 output of a `rsh host man manpage' command, or the output of an | |
1945 `nroff -man -Tman manpage' command to make them readable. | |
1946 Man-cleanup-manpage is faster, but does not fontify. | |
1947 | |
1948 ** The new function modify-face makes it easy to specify | |
1949 all the attributes of a face, all at once. | |
1950 | |
1951 ** Faces now support background stippling. | |
1952 | |
1953 Use the command set-face-stipple to specify the stipple-pattern for a | |
1954 face. Use face-stipple to access the specified stipple pattern. The | |
1955 existing face functions now handle the stipple pattern when | |
1956 appropriate. | |
1957 | |
1958 If you specify one of the standard gray colors as a face background | |
1959 color, and your display doesn't handle gray, Emacs automatically uses | |
1960 stipple instead to get the same effect. | |
1961 | |
1962 ** Changes in Font Lock mode. | |
1963 | |
1964 *** Fontification | |
1965 | |
1966 Two new default faces are provided; `font-lock-variable-name-face' and | |
1967 `font-lock-reference-face'. The face `font-lock-doc-string-face' has | |
1968 been removed since it is the same as the existing | |
1969 `font-lock-string-face'. Where appropriate, fontification | |
1970 automatically uses these new faces. | |
1971 | |
1972 Fontification via commands `font-lock-mode' and | |
1973 `font-lock-fontify-buffer' is now cleanly interruptible (i.e., with | |
1974 C-g). If you interrupt during the fontification process, the buffer | |
1975 remains in its previous modified state and all highlighting is removed | |
1976 from the buffer. | |
1977 | |
1978 For C/C++ modes, Font Lock mode is much faster but highlights much | |
1979 more. Other modes are faster/more extensive/more discriminatory, or a | |
1980 combination of these. | |
1981 | |
1982 To enable Font Lock mode, add the new function `turn-on-font-lock' in | |
1983 one of the following ways: | |
1984 | |
1985 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
1986 | |
1987 Or for any visited file with: | |
1988 | |
1989 (add-hook 'find-file-hooks 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
1990 | |
1991 *** Supports color and grayscale displays | |
1992 | |
1993 Font Lock mode supports different ways of highlighting, depending on | |
1994 the type of display and background shade. Attributes (face color, | |
1995 bold, italic and underline, and display type and background mode) can | |
1996 be controlled either from Emacs Lisp or X resources. | |
1997 | |
1998 See the new variables `font-lock-display-type' and | |
1999 `font-lock-face-attributes'. | |
2000 | |
2001 *** Supports more modes | |
2002 | |
2003 The following modes are directly supported: | |
2004 | |
2005 ada-mode, asm-mode, bibtex-mode, c++-c-mode, c++-mode, c-mode, | |
2006 change-log-mode, compilation-mode, dired-mode, emacs-lisp-mode, | |
2007 fortran-mode, latex-mode, lisp-mode, mail-mode, makefile-mode, | |
2008 outline-mode, pascal-mode, perl-mode, plain-tex-mode, rmail-mode, | |
2009 rmail-summary-mode, scheme-mode, shell-mode, slitex-mode, tex-mode, | |
2010 texinfo-mode. | |
2011 | |
2012 See the new variables `font-lock-defaults-alist' and | |
2013 `font-lock-defaults'. | |
2014 | |
2015 Some modes support different levels of fontification. You can choose | |
2016 to use the minimum or maximum available decoration by changing the | |
2017 value of the new variable `font-lock-maximum-decoration'. | |
2018 | |
2019 Programmers are urged to make available to the community their own | |
2020 keywords for modes not yet supported. See font-lock.el for | |
2021 information about efficiency. | |
2022 | |
2023 *** fast-lock | |
2024 | |
2025 The fast-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by saving font choices | |
2026 in associated cache files. When you visit a file with Font Lock mode | |
2027 and Fast Lock mode turned on for the first time, the file's buffer is | |
2028 fontified as normal. When certain events occur (such as exiting | |
2029 Emacs), Fast Lock saves the highlighting in a cache file. When you | |
2030 subsequently visit this file, its cache is used to restore the | |
2031 highlighting. | |
2032 | |
2033 To use this package, put in your `~/.emacs': | |
2034 | |
2035 (add-hook 'font-lock-mode-hook 'turn-on-fast-lock) | |
2036 | |
2037 To control the use of caches, see the documentation for `fast-lock-mode'. | |
2038 | |
2039 ** You can tell pop-to-buffer to display certain buffers in the selected | |
2040 window rather than finding some other window to display them in. | |
2041 There are two variables you can use to specify these buffers. | |
2042 | |
2043 same-window-buffer-names holds a list of buffer names; if a buffer's | |
2044 name appears in this list, pop-to-buffer puts it in the selected window. | |
2045 | |
2046 same-window-regexps holds a list of regexps--if any one of them | |
2047 matches a buffer's name, then pop-to-buffer puts that buffer in the | |
2048 selected window. | |
2049 | |
2050 The default values of these variables are not nil: they list various | |
2051 buffers that normally appear, when you as for them, in the selected | |
2052 window. These include shell buffers, mail buffers, telnet buffers, | |
2053 and others. By removing elements from these variables, you can ask | |
2054 Emacs to display those buffers in separate windows. | |
2055 | |
2056 ** The special-display-buffer-names and special-display-regexps lists | |
2057 have been generalized. An element may now be a list. The car of the list | |
2058 is the buffer name or regular expression for matching buffer names. | |
2059 | |
2060 The cdr of the list can be an alist specifying additional frame | |
2061 parameters for use in constructing the special display frame. | |
2062 | |
2063 Alternatively, the cdr can have this form: | |
2064 | |
2065 (FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
2066 | |
2067 where FUNCTION is a symbol. Then the frame is constructed by calling | |
2068 FUNCTION; its first argument is the buffer, and its remaining | |
2069 arguments are ARGS. | |
2070 | |
2071 ** If the environment variable REPLYTO is set, its value is the default | |
2072 for mail-default-reply-to. | |
2073 | |
2074 ** When you send a message in Emacs, if you specify an Rmail file with | |
2075 the FCC: header field, Emacs converts the message to Rmail format | |
2076 before writing it. Thus, the file never contains anything but Rmail | |
2077 format messages. | |
2078 | |
2079 ** The new variable mail-from-style controls whether the From: header | |
2080 should include the sender's full name, and if so, which format to use. | |
2081 | |
2082 ** The new variable mail-personal-alias-file specifies the name of the | |
2083 user's personal aliases. This defaults to the file ~/.mailrc. | |
2084 mailabbrev.el used to have its own variable for this purpose | |
2085 (mail-abbrev-mailrc-file). That variable is no longer used. | |
2086 | |
2087 ** In Buffer-Menu mode, the d and C-d commands (which mark buffers for | |
2088 deletion) now accept a prefix argument which serves as a repeat count. | |
2089 | |
2090 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
2091 | |
2092 *** Reference keys can now be entered with TAB completion. All | |
2093 reference keys defined in that buffer and all labels that appear in | |
2094 crossreference entries are object to completion. | |
2095 | |
2096 *** Braces are supported as field delimiters in addition to quotes. | |
2097 BibTeX entries may have brace-delimited and quote-delimited fields | |
2098 intermixed. The delimiters generated for new entries are specified by | |
2099 the variables bibtex-field-left-delimiter and | |
2100 bibtex-field-right-delimiter on a buffer-local basis. Those variables | |
2101 default to braces, since it is easier to put quote accented characters | |
2102 (as the german umlauts) into a brace-delimited entry. | |
2103 | |
2104 *** The function bibtex-clean-entry can now be invoked with a prefix | |
2105 argument. In this case, a label is automatically generated from | |
2106 various fields in the record. If bibtex-clean-entry is invoked on a | |
2107 record without label, a label is also generated automatically. | |
2108 Various variables (all beginning with `bibtex-autokey-') control the | |
2109 creation of that key. The variable bibtex-autokey-edit-before-use | |
2110 determines, if the user is allowed to edit auto-generated reference | |
2111 keys before they are used. | |
2112 | |
2113 *** A New function bibtex-complete-string completes strings with | |
2114 respect to the strings defined in this buffer and a set of predefined | |
2115 strings (initialized to the string macros defined in the standard | |
2116 BibTeX style files) in the same way in which ispell-complete-word | |
2117 works with respect to words in a dictionary. Candidates for | |
2118 bibtex-complete-string are initialized from variable | |
2119 bibtex-predefined-strings and by parsing the files found in | |
2120 bibtex-string-files for @String definitions. | |
2121 | |
2122 *** Every reference/field pair has now attached a comment which | |
2123 appears in the echo area when this field is edited. These comments | |
2124 should provide useful hints for BibTeX usage, especially for BibTeX | |
2125 beginners. New variable bibtex-help-message determines if these help | |
2126 messages are to appear in the minibuffer when moving to a text entry. | |
2127 | |
2128 *** Inscriptions of menu bar changed from "Entry Types" to | |
2129 "Entry-Types" and "Bibtex Edit" to "BibTeX-Edit". | |
2130 | |
2131 *** The variable bibtex-include-OPTcrossref is now not longer a binary | |
2132 switch but a list of reference names which should contain a crossref | |
2133 field. E.g., you can tell bibtex-mode you want a crossref field for | |
2134 @InProceedings and @InBook entries but for no other. | |
2135 | |
2136 *** The function validate-bibtex-buffer was completely rewritten to | |
2137 validate if a buffer is syntactically correct. find-bibtex-duplicates | |
2138 is no longer a function itself but was moved into | |
2139 validate-bibtex-buffer. | |
2140 | |
2141 *** Cleaning a BibTeX entry tests, if necessary fields are there. | |
2142 E.g., if you tell bibtex-mode to include a crossref entry, some fields | |
2143 are optional which would be required without the crossref entry. If | |
2144 you now leave the crossref entry empty and do a bibtex-clean-entry | |
2145 with some now required fields left empty, version 2.0 of bibtex.el | |
2146 complains about the absence of these fields, whereas version 1.3 | |
2147 didn't. | |
2148 | |
2149 *** Default value for variables bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries and | |
2150 bibtex-sort-ignore-string-entries is now t. | |
2151 | |
2152 *** All interactive functions are renamed to begin with `bibtex-'. | |
2153 | |
2154 *** Keybindings with \C-c\C-e entry changed for unification. Often | |
2155 used reference types are now on control-modified keys, mediocre used | |
2156 types are on unmodified keys, seldom used types are on shift-modified | |
2157 keys and almost never used types on meta-modified keys. | |
2158 | |
2159 * Configuration Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
2160 | |
2161 ** Emacs now uses directory /usr/local/share for most of its installed | |
2162 files. This follows a GNU convention for directory usage. | |
2163 | |
2164 ** The option --with-x11 is no longer supported. | |
2165 X11 is the only version of X that Emacs 19.29 supports; | |
2166 use --with-x if you need to request X support explicitly. | |
2167 (Normally this should not be necessary, since configure should | |
2168 automatically enable X support if X is installed on your machine.) | |
2169 | |
2170 ** If you use the site-init.el file to set the variable | |
2171 mail-host-address to a string in the dumped Emacs, that string becomes | |
2172 the default host address for initializing user-mail-address. | |
2173 It is used instead of the value of (system-name). | |
2174 | |
2175 * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
2176 | |
2177 ** Basic Lisp | |
2178 | |
2179 *** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines. | |
2180 This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1, | |
2181 or 134,217,727. | |
2182 | |
2183 *** You can now use Common Lisp syntax for the backquote and comma | |
2184 macros. Thus, you can now write `(x ,y z) instead of (` (x (, y) z)). | |
2185 | |
2186 The old syntax is still accepted. | |
2187 | |
2188 *** The new function rassoc is like assoc, except that it compares the | |
2189 key against the cdr of each alist element, where assoc would compare | |
2190 it against the car of each alist element. | |
2191 | |
2192 *** The new function unintern deletes a symbol from an obarray. The | |
2193 first argument can be the symbol to delete, or a string giving its | |
2194 name. The second argument specifies the obarray (nil means the | |
2195 current default obarray). | |
2196 | |
2197 If the specified symbol is not in the obarray, or if there's no symbol | |
2198 in the obarray matching the specified string, unintern does nothing | |
2199 and returns nil. If it does delete a symbol, it returns t. | |
2200 | |
2201 *** You can specify an alternative read function for use by load and | |
2202 eval-region by binding the variable load-read-function to some other | |
2203 function. This function should accept one argument just like read. | |
2204 If load-read-function is nil, load and eval-region use ordinary read. | |
2205 | |
2206 *** The new function `type-of' takes any object as argument, and | |
2207 returns a symbol identifying the type of that object--one of `symbol', | |
2208 `integer', `float', `string', `cons', `vector', `marker', `overlay', | |
2209 `window', `buffer', `subr', `compiled-function', | |
2210 `window-configuration', `process'. | |
2211 | |
2212 *** When you use eval-after-load for a file that is already loaded, it | |
2213 executes the FORM right away. As before, if the file is not yet | |
2214 loaded, it arranges to execute FORM if and when the file is loaded | |
2215 later. The result is: if you have called eval-after-load for a file, | |
2216 and if that file has been loaded, then regardless of the order of | |
2217 these two events, the specified form has been evaluated. | |
2218 | |
2219 *** The Lisp construct #@NUMBER now skips the next NUMBER characters, | |
2220 treating them as a comment. | |
2221 | |
2222 You would not want to use this in a file you edit by hand, but it is | |
2223 useful for commenting out parts of machine-generated files. | |
2224 | |
2225 *** Two new functions, `plist-get' and `plist-put', | |
2226 allow you to modify and retrieve values from lists formatted as property-lists. | |
2227 They work like `get' and `put', but operate on any list. | |
2228 `plist-put' returns the modified property-list; you must store it | |
2229 back where you got it. | |
2230 | |
2231 *** The new function add-to-list is called with two elements, | |
2232 a variable that holds a list and a new element. | |
2233 It adds the element to the list unless it is already present. | |
2234 It compares elements using `equal'. Here is an example: | |
2235 | |
2236 (setq foo '(a b)) => (a b) | |
2237 | |
2238 (add-to-list 'foo 'c) => (c a b) | |
2239 | |
2240 (add-to-list 'foo 'b) => (c a b) | |
2241 | |
2242 foo => (c a b) | |
2243 | |
2244 ** Changes in compilation. | |
2245 | |
2246 Functions and variables loaded from a byte-compiled file | |
2247 now refer to the file for their doc strings. | |
2248 | |
2249 This has a few consequences: | |
2250 | |
2251 -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory. | |
2252 -- Reference to doc strings is a little slower (the same speed | |
2253 as reference to the doc strings of primitive and preloaded functions). | |
2254 -- The compiled files will not work in old versions of Emacs. | |
2255 -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer | |
2256 find these doc strings. | |
2257 -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new | |
2258 version), then further access to documentation strings will get | |
2259 nonsense results. | |
2260 | |
2261 The byte compiler now optionally supports lazy loading of compiled | |
2262 functions' definitions. If you enable this feature when you compile, | |
2263 loading the compiled file does not actually bring the function | |
2264 definitions into core. Instead it creates references to the compiled | |
2265 file, and brings each function's definition into core the first time | |
2266 you call that function, or when you force it with the new function | |
2267 `fetch-bytecode'. | |
2268 | |
2269 Using the lazy loading feature has a few consequences: | |
2270 | |
2271 -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory. | |
2272 -- Calling any function in the file for the first time is slower. | |
2273 -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer | |
2274 find the function definitions. | |
2275 -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new | |
2276 version), then further access to functions not already loaded | |
2277 will get nonsense results. | |
2278 | |
2279 To enable the lazy loading feature, set up a non-nil file local | |
2280 variable binding for the variable `byte-compile-dynamic' in the Lisp | |
2281 source file. For example, put this on the first line: | |
2282 | |
2283 -*-byte-compile-dynamic: t;-*- | |
2284 | |
2285 It's a good idea to use the lazy loading feature for a file that | |
2286 contains many functions, most of which are not actually used by a | |
2287 given user in a given session. | |
2288 | |
2289 To turn off the basic feature of referring to the file for doc | |
2290 strings, set byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings to nil. You can do this | |
2291 globally, or for one source file by adding this to the first line: | |
2292 | |
2293 -*-byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings: nil;-*- | |
2294 | |
2295 ** Strings | |
2296 | |
2297 *** Do not pass integer arguments to `concat' (or `vconcat' or | |
2298 `append'). We are phasing out the old unrecommended support for | |
2299 integers as arguments to these functions, in preparation for treating | |
2300 numbers as single characters in a future release. To concatenate | |
2301 numbers in string form, use `number-to-string' first, or rewrite the | |
2302 call to use `format' instead of `concat'. | |
2303 | |
2304 *** The new function match-string returns the string of text matched at | |
2305 the given parenthesized expression by the last regexp search, or nil | |
2306 if there was no match. If the last match was by `string-match' on a | |
2307 string, the string must be given. Therefore, this function can be | |
2308 used in place of `buffer-substring' and `substring', when using | |
2309 `match-beginning' and `match-end' to find match positions. | |
2310 | |
2311 (match-string N) or (match-string N STRING) | |
2312 | |
2313 *** The function replace-match now accepts an optional fourth argument, | |
2314 STRING. Use this after performing string-match on STRING, to replace | |
2315 the portion of STRING that was matched. When used in this way, | |
2316 replace-match returns a newly created string which is the same as | |
2317 STRING except for the matched portion. | |
2318 | |
2319 *** The new function buffer-substring-no-properties | |
2320 is like buffer-substring except that the string it returns | |
2321 has no text properties. | |
2322 | |
2323 *** The function `equal' now considers two strings to be different | |
2324 if they don't have the same text properties. | |
2325 | |
2326 ** Completion | |
2327 | |
2328 *** all-completions now takes an optional fourth argument. | |
2329 If that argument is non-nil, completions that start with a space | |
2330 are ignored unless the initial string also starts with a space. | |
2331 (This used to happen unconditionally.) | |
2332 | |
2333 ** Local Variables | |
2334 | |
2335 *** Local hook variables. | |
2336 | |
2337 There is now a clean way to give a hook variable a buffer-local value. | |
2338 Call the function `make-local-hook' to do this. | |
2339 | |
2340 Once a hook variable is buffer-local, you can add hooks to it either | |
2341 globally or locally. run-hooks runs the local hook functions | |
2342 of the current buffer, then all the global hook functions. | |
2343 | |
2344 The functions add-hook and remove-hook take an additional optional | |
2345 argument LOCAL which says whether to add (or remove) a local hook | |
2346 function or a global one. | |
2347 | |
2348 Local hooks use t as an element of the (local) value of the hook | |
2349 variable as a flag meaning to use the global value also. | |
2350 | |
2351 *** The new function local-variable-p tells you whether a particular | |
2352 variable is buffer-local in the current buffer or a specified buffer. | |
2353 | |
2354 ** Editing Facilities | |
2355 | |
2356 *** The function copy-region-as-kill no longer sets this-command; | |
2357 as a result, a following kill command will not normally append | |
2358 to the text saved by copy-region-as-kill. | |
2359 | |
2360 *** Regular expression searching and matching no longer performs full | |
2361 Posix backtracking by default. They now stop with the first match found | |
2362 instead of looking for the longest match--just as they did in Emacs 18. | |
2363 The reason for this change is to get higher speed. | |
2364 | |
2365 There are new functions you can use if you really want to search or | |
2366 match with Posix behavior: posix-search-forward, | |
2367 posix-search-backward, posix-looking-at, and posix-string-match. Call | |
2368 these just like re-search-forward, re-search-backward, looking-at, and | |
2369 string-match. | |
2370 | |
2371 ** Files | |
2372 | |
2373 *** The new variable `format-alist' defines file formats, | |
2374 which are ways of translating between the data in a file and things | |
2375 (text, text-properties, and possibly other information) in a buffer. | |
2376 | |
2377 `format-alist' has one element for each format. Each element is a | |
2378 list like this: | |
2379 (NAME DOC-STRING REGEXP FROM-FN TO-FN MODIFY MODE-FN) | |
2380 containing the name of the format, a documentation string, a regular | |
2381 expression which is used to recognize files in that format, a decoding | |
2382 function, an encoding function, a flag that indicates whether the | |
2383 encoding function modifies the buffer, and a mode function. | |
2384 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
2385 FROM-FN is called to decode files in that format; it gets two args, BEGIN |
25853 | 2386 and END, and can make any modifications it likes, returning the new |
2387 end position. It must make sure that the beginning of the file no | |
2388 longer matches REGEXP, or else it will get called again. | |
2389 TO-FN is called to encode a region into that format; it is also passed BEGIN | |
2390 and END, and either returns a list of annotations as in | |
2391 `write-region-annotate-functions', or modifies the region and returns | |
2392 the new end position. | |
2393 MODIFY, if non-nil, means the TO-FN modifies the region. If nil, TO-FN may | |
2394 not make any changes and should return a list of annotations. | |
2395 | |
2396 `insert-file-contents' checks the beginning of the file that it is | |
2397 inserting to see if it matches one of the regexps. If so, then it | |
2398 calls the decoding function, and then looks for another match. When | |
2399 visiting a file, it also calls the mode function, and sets the | |
2400 variable `buffer-file-format' to the list of formats that the file | |
2401 used. | |
2402 | |
2403 `write-region' calls the encoding functions for each format in | |
2404 `buffer-file-format' before it writes the file. To save a file in a | |
2405 different format, either set `buffer-file-format' to a different | |
2406 value, or call the new function `format-write-file'. | |
2407 | |
2408 Since some encoding functions may be slow, you can request that | |
2409 auto-save use a format different from the buffer's default by setting | |
2410 the variable `auto-save-file-format' to the desired format. This will | |
2411 determine the format of all auto-save files. | |
2412 | |
2413 *** The new function file-ownership-preserved-p tells you whether | |
2414 deleting a file and recreating it would keep the file's owner | |
2415 unchanged. | |
2416 | |
2417 *** The new function file-regular-p returns t if a file | |
2418 is a "regular" file (not a directory, symlink, named pipe, | |
2419 terminal, or other I/O device). | |
2420 | |
2421 *** The new function file-name-sans-extension discards the extension | |
2422 of a file name. You call it with a file name, and returns a string | |
2423 lacking the extension. | |
2424 | |
2425 *** The variable path-separator is a string which says which | |
2426 character separates directories in a search path. It is ":" | |
2427 for Unix and GNU systems, ";" for MSDOG and Windows NT. | |
2428 | |
2429 ** Commands and Key Sequences | |
2430 | |
2431 *** Key sequences consisting of C-c followed by {, }, <, >, : or ; are | |
2432 now reserved for major modes. Sequences consisting of C-c followed by | |
2433 any other punctuation character are now meant for minor modes. We don't | |
2434 plan to convert all existing major modes to stop using those sequences, | |
2435 but we hope to keep them to a minimum. | |
2436 | |
2437 *** When the post-command-hook or the pre-command-hook gets an error, the error | |
2438 is silently ignored. Emacs no longer sets the hook variable to nil when this | |
2439 happens. Meanwhile, the hook functions can now alter the hook variable in | |
2440 a normal fashion; there is no need to do anything special. | |
2441 | |
2442 *** define-key, lookup-key, and various other functions for changing or | |
2443 looking up key bindings now let you write an event type with a list | |
2444 like (ctrl meta newline) or (meta ?d), as in XEmacs. (ctrl meta newline) | |
2445 is equivalent to the event type symbol C-M-newline, and (meta ?d) | |
2446 is equivalent to the character ?\M-d. | |
2447 | |
2448 *** The function event-convert-list converts a list such as | |
2449 (meta ?d) into the corresponding event type (a symbol or integer). | |
2450 | |
2451 *** In an interactive spec, `k' means to read a key sequence. In this | |
2452 key sequence, upper case characters and shifted function keys which | |
2453 have no bindings are converted to lower case if that makes them | |
2454 defined. | |
2455 | |
2456 The new interactive code `K' reads a key sequence similarly, but does | |
2457 not convert the last event. `K' is useful for reading a key sequence | |
2458 to be given a binding. | |
2459 | |
2460 *** The variable overriding-local-map now has no effect on the menu bar | |
2461 display unless overriding-local-map-menu-flag is non-nil. This is why | |
2462 incremental search no longer temporarily changes the menu bars. | |
2463 | |
2464 Note that overriding-local-map does still affect the execution of key | |
2465 sequences entered using the menu bar. So if you use | |
2466 overriding-local-map, and a menu bar key sequence comes in, you should | |
2467 make sure to clear overriding-local-map before that key sequence gets | |
2468 looked up and executed. But this is what you'd normally do anyway: | |
2469 programs that use overriding-local-map normally exit and "put back" | |
2470 any event such as menu-bar that they do not handle specially. | |
2471 | |
2472 *** The new variable `overriding-terminal-local-map' is like | |
2473 overriding-local-map, but is specific to a single terminal. | |
2474 | |
2475 *** delete-frame events. | |
2476 | |
2477 When you use the X window manager's "delete window" command, this now | |
2478 generates a delete-frame event. The standard definition of this event | |
2479 is a command that deletes the frame that received the event, and kills | |
2480 Emacs when the last visible or iconified frame is deleted. You can | |
2481 rebind the event to some other command if you wish. | |
2482 | |
2483 *** Two new types of events, iconify-frame and make-frame-visible, | |
2484 indicate that the user iconified or deiconified a frame with the | |
2485 window manager. Since the window manager has already done the work, | |
2486 the default definition for both event types in Emacs is to do nothing. | |
2487 | |
2488 ** Frames and X | |
2489 | |
2490 *** Certain Lisp variables are now local to an X terminal (in other | |
2491 words, all the screens of a single X server). The value in effect, at | |
2492 any given time, is the one that belongs to the terminal of the | |
2493 selected frame. The terminal-local variables are | |
2494 default-minibuffer-frame, system-key-alist, defining-kbd-macro, and | |
2495 last-kbd-macro. There is no way for Lisp programs to create others. | |
2496 | |
2497 The terminal-local variables cannot be buffer-local. | |
2498 | |
2499 *** When you create an X frame, for the `top' and `left' frame | |
2500 parameters, you can now use values of the form (+ N) or (- N), where N | |
2501 is an integer. (+ N) means N pixels to the right of the left edge of | |
2502 the screen and (- N) means N pixels to the left of the right edge. In | |
2503 both cases, N may be zero (exactly at the edge) or negative (putting | |
2504 the window partly off the screen). | |
2505 | |
2506 The function x-parse-geometry can return values of these forms | |
2507 for certain inputs. | |
2508 | |
2509 *** The variable menu-bar-file-menu has been renamed to | |
2510 menu-bar-files-menu to match the actual item that appears in the menu. | |
2511 (All the other such variable names do match.) | |
2512 | |
2513 *** The new function active-minibuffer-window returns the minibuffer window | |
2514 currently active, or nil if none is now active. | |
2515 | |
2516 *** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame, | |
2517 previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window | |
2518 and delete-windows-on, if you specify 0 for the last argument, | |
2519 it means to consider all visible and iconified frames. | |
2520 | |
2521 *** When you set a frame's cursor type with modify-frame-parameters, | |
2522 you can now specify (bar . INTEGER) as the cursor type. This stands | |
2523 for a bar cursor of width INTEGER. | |
2524 | |
2525 *** The new function facep returns t if its argument is a face name | |
2526 (or if it is a vector such as is used internally by the Lisp code | |
2527 to represent a face). | |
2528 | |
2529 *** Each frame can now have a buffer-predicate function, | |
2530 which is the `buffer-predicate' frame parameter. | |
2531 When `other-buffer' looks for an alternative buffer, it considers | |
2532 only the buffers that fit the selected frame's buffer predicate (if it | |
2533 has one). This is useful for applications that make their own frames. | |
2534 | |
2535 *** When you create an X frame, you can now specify the frame parameter | |
2536 `display'. This says which display to put the frame on. The value | |
2537 should be a display name--a string of the form | |
2538 "HOST:DPYNUMBER.SCREENNUMBER". | |
2539 | |
2540 The functions x-server-... and x-display-... now take an optional | |
2541 argument which specifies the display to ask about. You can use either | |
2542 a display name string or a frame. A value of nil stands for the | |
2543 selected frame. | |
2544 | |
2545 To close the connection to an X display, use the function | |
2546 x-close-connection. Specify which display with a display name. You | |
2547 cannot close the connection if Emacs still has frames open on that | |
2548 display. | |
2549 | |
2550 x-display-list returns a list indicating which displays Emacs has | |
2551 connections to. Its elements are display names (strings). | |
2552 | |
2553 *** The icon-type frame parameter may now be a file name. | |
2554 Then the contents of that file specify the icon bitmap to use | |
2555 for that frame. | |
2556 | |
2557 *** The title of an Emacs frame, displayed by most window managers, is | |
2558 set from frame-title-format or icon-title-format. These have the same | |
2559 structure as mode-line-format. | |
2560 | |
2561 *** x-display-grayscale-p is a new function that returns non-nil if | |
2562 your X server can display shades of gray. Currently it returns | |
2563 non-nil for color displays (because they can display shades of gray); | |
2564 we may change it in the next version to return nil for color displays. | |
2565 | |
2566 *** The frame parameter scroll-bar-width specifies the width of the | |
2567 scrollbar in pixels. | |
2568 | |
2569 ** Buffers | |
2570 | |
2571 *** Creating a buffer with get-buffer-create does not obey | |
2572 default-major-mode. That variable is now handled in a separate | |
2573 function, set-buffer-major-mode. get-buffer-create and generate-new-buffer | |
2574 always leave the newly created buffer in Fundamental mode. | |
2575 | |
2576 Creating a new buffer by visiting a file or with switch-to-buffer, | |
2577 pop-to-buffer, and similar functions does call set-buffer-major-mode | |
2578 to select the default major mode specified with default-major-mode. | |
2579 | |
2580 *** You can now create an "indirect buffer". An indirect buffer shares | |
2581 its text, including text properties, with another buffer (the "base | |
2582 buffer"), but has its own major mode, local variables, overlays, and | |
2583 narrowing. An indirect buffer has a name of its own, distinct from | |
2584 those of the base buffer and all other buffers. An indirect buffer | |
2585 cannot itself be visiting a file (though its base buffer can be). | |
2586 The base buffer cannot itself be indirect. | |
2587 | |
2588 Use (make-indirect-buffer BASE-BUFFER NAME) to make an indirect buffer | |
2589 named NAME whose base is BASE-BUFFER. If BASE-BUFFER is an indirect | |
2590 buffer, its base buffer is used as the base for the new buffer. | |
2591 | |
2592 You can make an indirect buffer current, or switch to it in a window, | |
2593 just as you would a non-indirect buffer. | |
2594 | |
2595 The function buffer-base-buffer, given an indirect buffer, returns its | |
2596 base buffer. It returns nil when given an ordinary buffer (not | |
2597 indirect). | |
2598 | |
2599 The library `noutline' has versions of Outline mode and Outline minor | |
2600 mode which let you display different parts of the outline in different | |
2601 indirect buffers. | |
2602 | |
2603 ** Subprocesses | |
2604 | |
2605 *** The functions call-process and call-process-region now allow | |
2606 you to direct error message output from the subprocess into a | |
2607 separate destination, instead of mixing it with ordinary output. | |
2608 To do this, specify for the third argument, BUFFER, a list of the form | |
2609 (BUFFER-OR-NAME ERROR-DESTINATION) | |
2610 BUFFER-OR-NAME specifies where to put ordinary output; it should | |
2611 be a buffer or buffer name, or t, nil or 0. This is what would | |
2612 have been the BUFFER argument, ordinarily. | |
2613 | |
2614 ERROR-DESTINATION specifies where to put the error output. | |
2615 nil means discard it, t means mix it with the ordinary output, | |
2616 and a string specifies a file name to write this output into. | |
2617 | |
2618 You can't specify a buffer to put the error output in; that is not | |
2619 easy to implement directly. You can put the error output into a | |
2620 buffer by sending it to a temporary file and then inserting the file | |
2621 into a buffer. | |
2622 | |
2623 *** Comint mode changes: | |
2624 | |
2625 **** The variable comint-completion-addsuffix can also be a cons pair | |
2626 of the form (DIRSUFFIX . FILESUFFIX), where DIRSUFFIX and FILESUFFIX are | |
2627 strings added on unambiguous or exact completion of directories and file | |
2628 names, respectively. | |
2629 | |
2630 ** Text properties | |
2631 | |
2632 *** You can now specify which values of the `invisible' property | |
2633 make text invisible in a given buffer. The variable | |
2634 `buffer-invisibility-spec', which is always local in all buffers, | |
2635 controls this. | |
2636 | |
2637 If its value is t, then any non-nil `invisible' property makes | |
2638 a character invisible. | |
2639 | |
2640 If its value is a list, then a character is invisible if its | |
2641 `invisible' property value appears as a member of the list, or if it | |
2642 appears as the car of a member of the list. | |
2643 | |
2644 When the `invisible' property value appears as the car of a member of | |
2645 the `buffer-invisibility-spec' list, then the cdr of that member has | |
2646 an effect. If it is non-nil, then an ellipsis appears in place of the | |
2647 character. (This happens only for the *last* invisible character in a | |
2648 series of consecutive invisible characters, and only at the end of a | |
2649 line.) | |
2650 | |
2651 If a character's `invisible' property is a list, then Emacs checks each | |
2652 element of the list against `buffer-invisibility-spec'. If any element | |
2653 matches, the character is invisible. | |
2654 | |
2655 *** The command `list-text-properties-at' shows what text properties | |
2656 are in effect at point. | |
2657 | |
2658 *** Frame objects now exist in Emacs even on systems that don't support | |
2659 X Windows. You can create multiple frames, and switch between them | |
2660 using select-frame. The selected frame is actually displayed on your | |
2661 terminal; other frames are not displayed at all. The selected frame | |
2662 number appears in the mode line after `Emacs', except for frame 1. | |
2663 | |
2664 Switching frames on ASCII terminals is therefore more or less | |
2665 equivalent to switching between different window configurations. | |
2666 | |
2667 *** The new variable window-size-change-functions holds a list of | |
2668 functions to be called if window sizes change (or if windows are | |
2669 created or deleted). The functions are called once for each frame on | |
2670 which changes have occurred, with the frame as the sole argument. | |
2671 This takes place shortly before redisplay. | |
2672 | |
2673 *** The modification hook functions of overlays now work differently. | |
2674 They are called both before and after each change. This makes it | |
2675 possible for the functions to determine exactly what the change was. | |
2676 | |
2677 This change affects three overlay properties: the modification-hooks | |
2678 property, a list of functions called for deletions overlapping the | |
2679 overlay's range and for insertions inside it; the | |
2680 insert-in-front-hooks, a list of functions called for insertions at | |
2681 the beginning of the overlay; and the insert-behind-hooks, a list of | |
2682 functions called for insertions at the end of the overlay. | |
2683 | |
2684 Each function is called both before and after each change that it | |
2685 applies to. Before the change, it is called with four arguments: | |
2686 (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY nil START END) | |
2687 START and END are the same arguments that the before-change-functions | |
2688 receive. | |
2689 | |
2690 After the change, each function is called with five arguments: | |
2691 (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY t START END OLDSIZE) | |
2692 The last arguments, START and END and OLDSIZE, | |
2693 are the same arguments that the after-change-functions receive. | |
2694 | |
2695 This means the function must accept either four or five arguments. | |
2696 | |
2697 *** You can set defaults for text-properties with the new variable | |
2698 `default-text-properties'. Its value is a property list; the values | |
2699 specified there are used whenever a character (or its category) does | |
2700 not specify a value. | |
2701 | |
2702 *** The `face' property of a character or an overlay can now be a list | |
2703 of face names. Formerly it had to be just one face name. | |
2704 | |
2705 *** Changes in handling the `intangible' text property. | |
2706 | |
2707 **** If inhibit-point-motion-hooks is non-nil, then `intangible' properties | |
2708 are ignored. | |
2709 | |
2710 **** Moving to just before a stretch of intangible text | |
2711 is no longer special in any way. Point stays at that place. | |
2712 | |
2713 **** When you move point backwards into the midst of intangible text, | |
2714 point moves back to the beginning of that text. (It used to move | |
2715 forward to the end of that text, which was not very useful.) | |
2716 | |
2717 **** When moving across intangible text, Emacs stops wherever the | |
2718 property value changes. So if you have two stretches of intangible | |
2719 text, with different non-nil intangible properties, it is possible to | |
2720 place point between them. | |
2721 | |
2722 ** Overlays | |
2723 | |
2724 *** Overlay changes. | |
2725 | |
2726 **** The new function previous-overlay-change returns the position of | |
2727 the previous overlay start or end, before a specified position. This | |
2728 is the backwards-moving counterpart of next-overlay-change. | |
2729 | |
2730 **** overlay-get now supports category properties on an overlay | |
2731 the same way get-text-property supports them as text properties. | |
2732 | |
2733 Specifically, if an overlay does not have the property PROP that you | |
2734 ask for, but it does have a `category' property which is a symbol, | |
2735 then that symbol's PROP property is used. | |
2736 | |
2737 **** If an overlay has a non-nil `evaporate' property, it will be | |
2738 deleted if it ever becomes empty (i.e., when it spans no characters). | |
2739 | |
2740 **** If an overlay has a `before-string' and/or `after-string' property, | |
2741 these strings are displayed at the overlay's endpoints. | |
2742 | |
2743 ** Filling | |
2744 | |
2745 *** The new variable fill-paragraph-function provides a way for major | |
2746 modes to override the filling of paragraphs. If this is non-nil, | |
2747 fill-paragraph calls it as a function, passing along its sole | |
2748 argument. If the function returns non-nil, fill-paragraph assumes it | |
2749 has done the job and simply passes on whatever value it returned. | |
2750 | |
2751 The usual use of this feature is to fill comments in programming | |
2752 language modes. | |
2753 | |
2754 *** Text filling and justification changes: | |
2755 | |
2756 **** The new variable use-hard-newlines can be used to make a | |
2757 distinction between "hard" and "soft" newlines; the fill functions | |
2758 will then never remove a newline that was manually inserted. Hard | |
2759 newlines are marked with a non-nil `hard' text-property. | |
2760 | |
2761 **** The fill-column and left-margin can now be modified by text-properties. | |
2762 Most lisp programs should use the new functions (current-fill-column) and | |
2763 (current-left-margin), which return the proper values to use for the | |
2764 current line. | |
2765 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
2766 **** There are new functions for dealing with margins: |
25853 | 2767 |
2768 ***** Set-left-margin and set-right-margin (set the value for a region | |
2769 and re-fill). These functions take three arguments: two to specify | |
2770 a region, and the desired margin value. | |
2771 | |
2772 ***** Increase-left-margin, decrease-left-margin, increase-right-margin, and | |
2773 decrease-right-margin (change settings relative to current values, and | |
2774 re-fill). | |
2775 | |
2776 ***** move-to-left-margin moves point there, optionally adding | |
2777 indentation or changing tabs to spaces in order to make that possible. | |
2778 beginning-of-line-text also moves past the fill-prefix and any | |
2779 indentation added to center or right-justify a line, to the beginning | |
2780 of the text that the user actually typed. | |
2781 | |
2782 ***** delete-to-left-margin removes any left-margin indentation, but | |
2783 does not change the property. | |
2784 | |
2785 **** The paragraph-movement functions look for the paragraph-start and | |
2786 paragraph-separate regexps at the current left margin, not at the | |
2787 beginning of the line. This means that those regexps should NOT use ^ | |
2788 to anchor the search. However, for backwards compatibility, a ^ at | |
2789 the beginning of the regexp will be ignored, so most packages won't break. | |
2790 | |
2791 **** justify-current-line is now capable of doing left, center, or | |
2792 right justification as well as full justification. | |
2793 | |
2794 **** The fill functions can do any kind of justification based on the new | |
2795 `justification' text-property and `default-justification' variable, | |
2796 or arguments to the functions. They also have a new option which | |
2797 defeats the normal removal of extra whitespace. | |
2798 | |
2799 **** The new function `current-justification' returns the kind of | |
2800 justification used for the current line. The new function | |
2801 `set-justification' can be used to change it, including re-justifying | |
2802 the text of the region according to the new value. | |
2803 | |
2804 **** Filling and auto-fill are disabled if justification is `none'. | |
2805 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
2806 **** The auto-fill-function is now called regardless of whether |
25853 | 2807 the fill-column has been exceeded; the function can determine on its |
2808 own whether filling (or justification) is necessary. | |
2809 | |
2810 ** Processes | |
2811 | |
2812 *** process-tty-name is a new function that returns the name of the | |
2813 terminal that the process itself reads and writes on (not the name of | |
2814 the pty that Emacs uses to talk with that terminal). | |
2815 | |
2816 *** Errors in process filters and sentinels are now normally caught | |
2817 automatically, so that they don't abort other Lisp programs. | |
2818 | |
2819 Setting debug-on-error non-nil turns off this feature; then errors in | |
2820 filters and sentinels are not caught. As a result, they can invoke | |
2821 the debugger, under the control of debug-on-error. | |
2822 | |
2823 *** Emacs now preserves the match data around the execution of process | |
2824 filters and sentinels. You can use search and match functions freely | |
2825 in filters and sentinels without explicitly bothering to save the | |
2826 match data. | |
2827 | |
2828 ** Display | |
2829 | |
2830 *** The variable message-log-max controls how messages are logged in the | |
2831 "*Messages*" buffer. An integer value means to keep that many lines; | |
2832 t means to log with no limit; nil means disable message logging. Lisp | |
2833 code that calls `message' excessively (e.g. isearch.el) should probably | |
2834 bind this variable to nil. | |
2835 | |
2836 *** Display tables now have a new element, at index 261, specifying the | |
2837 glyph to use for the separator between two side-by-side windows. By | |
2838 default, this is the vertical bar character `|'. Probably the only | |
2839 other useful character to store for this element is a space, to make | |
2840 less visual separation between two side-by-side windows displaying | |
2841 related information. | |
2842 | |
2843 *** The new mode-line-format spec %c displays the current column number. | |
2844 | |
2845 *** The new variable blink-matching-delay specifies how long to keep | |
2846 the cursor at the matching open-paren, after you insert a close-paren. | |
2847 This is useful mainly on systems which can wait for a fraction of a | |
2848 second--you can then specify fractional values such as 0.5. | |
2849 | |
2850 *** Faster processing of buffers with long lines | |
2851 | |
2852 The new variable cache-long-line-scans determines whether Emacs | |
2853 should use caches to handle long lines more quickly. This variable is | |
2854 buffer-local, in all buffers. | |
2855 | |
2856 Normally, the line-motion functions work by scanning the buffer for | |
2857 newlines. Columnar operations (like `move-to-column' and | |
2858 `compute-motion') also work by scanning the buffer, summing character | |
2859 widths as they go. This works well for ordinary text, but if the | |
2860 buffer's lines are very long (say, more than 500 characters), these | |
2861 motion functions will take longer to execute. Emacs may also take | |
2862 longer to update the display. | |
2863 | |
2864 If cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, these motion functions cache | |
2865 the results of their scans, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning | |
2866 regions of the buffer until the text is modified. The caches are most | |
2867 beneficial when they prevent the most searching---that is, when the | |
2868 buffer contains long lines and large regions of characters with the | |
2869 same, fixed screen width. | |
2870 | |
2871 When cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, processing short lines will | |
2872 become slightly slower (because of the overhead of consulting the | |
2873 cache), and the caches will use memory roughly proportional to the | |
2874 number of newlines and characters whose screen width varies. | |
2875 | |
2876 The caches require no explicit maintenance; their accuracy is | |
2877 maintained internally by the Emacs primitives. Enabling or disabling | |
2878 the cache should not affect the behavior of any of the motion functions; | |
2879 it should only affect their performance. | |
2880 | |
2881 ** System Interface | |
2882 | |
2883 *** The function user-login-name now accepts an optional | |
2884 argument uid. If the argument is non-nil, user-login-name | |
2885 returns the login name for that user id. | |
2886 | |
2887 *** system-name, user-name, user-full-name and user-real-name are now | |
2888 variables as well as functions. The variables hold the same values | |
2889 that the functions would return. The new variable multiple-frames | |
2890 is non-nil if at least two non-minibuffer frames are visible. These | |
2891 variables may be useful in constructing the value of frame-title-format | |
2892 or icon-title-format. | |
2893 | |
2894 *** Changes in time-conversion functions. | |
2895 | |
2896 **** The new function format-time-string takes a format string and a | |
2897 time value. It converts the time to a string, according to the format | |
2898 specified. You can specify what kind of conversion to use with | |
2899 %-specifications. | |
2900 | |
2901 **** The new function decode-time converts a time value into a list of | |
2902 specific items of information: the year, month, day of week, day of | |
2903 month, hour, minute and second. (A time value is a list of two or | |
2904 three integers.) | |
2905 | |
2906 **** The new function encode-time converts specific items of time | |
2907 information--the second, minute, hour, day, month, year, and time | |
2908 zone--into a time value. | |
2909 | |
2910 * Changes in Emacs 19.27 | |
2911 | |
2912 There are no changes; however, here is one bug fix made in 19.26 that users | |
2913 think should be documented here. | |
2914 | |
2915 ** SPC and DEL in Info now handle menus consistently. | |
2916 | |
2917 SPC and DEL scroll through an entire subtree an Info manual. Once you | |
2918 scroll through a node far enough to reach a menu, SPC begins moving | |
2919 into the subnodes of the menu, starting with the first one. When you | |
2920 reach the end of a subnode, SPC moves into the next subnode, and so | |
2921 on. | |
2922 | |
2923 DEL more or less scrolls through the same text in reverse order. | |
2924 | |
2925 * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.26 | |
2926 | |
2927 ** In the X toolkit version, if you click on a menu bar item and | |
2928 release the button quickly outside the menu, the menu remains visible | |
2929 until you click or type something else. If you click on the menu, you | |
2930 select from the menu. Any other mouse click makes the menu disappear. | |
2931 Keyboard input gets rid of the menu and then is processed normally. | |
2932 | |
2933 "Quickly" means within double-click-time milliseconds. | |
2934 | |
2935 ** The C-x 5 commands to select a buffer in "another frame" now use an | |
2936 existing iconified frame, if any, deiconifying it. They also raise | |
2937 the frame. | |
2938 | |
2939 ** Region highlighting on a black-and-white-only display now uses | |
2940 underlining. Inverse-video had the problem that you couldn't see | |
2941 the cursor. | |
2942 | |
2943 ** You can now change the height of a window by pressing mouse-1 on | |
2944 the mode line and dragging it up and down. | |
2945 | |
2946 ** If you set the environment variable LC_CTYPE to iso_8859_1 or | |
2947 iso-8859-1, Emacs automatically sets up for display and syntactic | |
2948 handling of the ISO Latin-1 character set. | |
2949 | |
2950 This does not automatically load any of the packages for input of | |
2951 these characters, because it's not yet clear what is right to do. | |
2952 You must still explicitly load either iso-transl or iso-acc. | |
2953 | |
2954 ** For a read-only buffer that is also modified, the mode line now displays | |
2955 %* instead of %%. | |
2956 | |
2957 ** M-prior (scroll-other-window-down) is a new command that works like | |
2958 M-next (and C-M-v) but scrolls in the opposite direction. | |
2959 | |
2960 M-home moves to the beginning of the buffer, in the other window. | |
2961 M-end moves to the end of the buffer, in the other window. These two | |
2962 commands, along with M-next and M-prior, form a series of commands for | |
2963 moving around in the other window. | |
2964 | |
2965 ** In change logs, the mail address is now delimited with <...> instead | |
2966 of (...). | |
2967 | |
2968 This makes it a little more convenient to extract the mail address for | |
2969 use in mailing a message. | |
2970 | |
2971 ** In Shell mode and other comint modes, C-a has now returned to | |
2972 its ordinary meaning: move to the beginning of the line. | |
2973 Use C-c C-a to move to the end of the prompt. | |
2974 | |
2975 ** If you set mail-signature to t to cause automatic insertion of | |
2976 your .signature file, you now get a -- before the signature. | |
2977 | |
2978 ** Setting rmail-highlighted-headers to nil entirely turns off | |
2979 highlighting in Rmail. However, if your motivation for doing this is | |
2980 that the highlighted text doesn't look good on your display, it might | |
2981 be better to change the appearance of the `highlight' face. Once | |
2982 you've done that, you may find Rmail highlighting is useful. | |
2983 | |
2984 ** In the calendar, mouse-2 is now used only for commands that apply to a date. | |
2985 If you click it when not on a date, it gives an immediate error. | |
2986 | |
2987 Mouse-3 in the calendar now gives a menu of commands that do not apply | |
2988 to a particular date. | |
2989 | |
2990 The D command displays diary entries from a specified diary file (not | |
2991 your standard diary file). | |
2992 | |
2993 ** In the gnus-uu package, the binding for gnus-uu-threaded-decode-and-view | |
2994 is now C-c C-v C-d, not C-c C-v C-h. Thus, C-c C-v C-h is now available | |
2995 for asking for a list of the subcommands of C-c C-v. | |
2996 | |
2997 ** You can now specify "who you are" for various Emacs packages by | |
2998 setting just one variable, user-mail-address. This currently applies | |
2999 to posting news with GNUS and to making change log entries. It may | |
3000 apply to additional Emacs features in the future. | |
3001 | |
3002 * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.26: | |
3003 | |
3004 ** The function insert-char now takes an optional third argument | |
3005 which, if non-nil, says the inserted characters should inherit sticky | |
3006 text properties from the surrounding text. | |
3007 | |
3008 ** The `diary' library has been renamed to `diary-lib'. If you refer | |
3009 to this library in your Lisp code, you must update the references. | |
3010 | |
3011 ** Sending text to a subprocess can read input from subprocesses if it | |
3012 has to wait because the destination subprocess's terminal input buffer | |
3013 is full. | |
3014 | |
3015 It was already possible in unusual occasions for this operation to | |
3016 read subprocess input, but it did not happen very often. It is now | |
3017 more likely to happen. | |
3018 | |
3019 ** last-nonmenu-event is now bound to t around filter functions and sentinels. | |
3020 This is to ensure that y-or-n-p and yes-or-no-p use the keyboard by default. | |
3021 | |
3022 ** In mode lines, %+ now displays as % for unmodified read-only | |
3023 buffers. It is now the same as %* except in the case of a modified | |
3024 read-only buffer; in that case, %+ displays as *. | |
3025 | |
3026 The old meaning of %+ is now available on %&. | |
3027 It displays * for a modified buffer and - for an unmodified buffer, | |
3028 regardless of read-only status. | |
3029 | |
3030 ** You can now use `underline' in the color list of a face. | |
3031 It serves as a last resort, and says to underline the face | |
3032 (if previous color list elements can't be used). | |
3033 | |
3034 ** The new function x-color-values returns the list of color values | |
3035 for a given color name (a string). The list contains three integers | |
3036 which give the amounts of red, green and blue in the color: (R G B). | |
3037 | |
3038 ** In run-at-time, 0 as the repeat interval means "don't repeat". | |
3039 | |
3040 ** The variable trim-versions-without-asking has been renamed to | |
3041 delete-old-versions. | |
3042 | |
3043 ** The new function other-window-for-scrolling returns the choice of | |
3044 other window for C-M-v to scroll. | |
3045 | |
3046 ** Note that the function fceiling was mistakenly documented as fceil before. | |
3047 | |
3048 * Changes in cc-mode.el in Emacs 19.26: | |
3049 | |
3050 ** A new syntactic symbol has been added: substatement-open. It | |
3051 defines the open brace of a substatement block. These used to get: | |
3052 ((block-open ...) (substatement . ...)). | |
3053 | |
3054 Non-block substatement lines still get just ((substatement . ...)) | |
3055 | |
3056 Note that the custom indent function c-adaptive-block-open has been | |
3057 removed as obsolete. | |
3058 | |
3059 ** You can now specify the `hanginess' of closing braces. See | |
3060 c-hanging-braces-alist. | |
3061 | |
3062 ** Recognizes try and catch blocks in C++. They are given the | |
3063 substatement syntactic symbol. | |
3064 | |
3065 ** should be generally more forgiving about non-GNU standard top-level | |
3066 construct definition styles (i.e. where the function/class/struct | |
3067 opening brace does not start in column zero). | |
3068 | |
3069 If you hang the braces that open a top-level construct on the right | |
3070 edge, and you find you still need to define defun-open-prompt (Emacs | |
3071 19) please let me know. Note that there may still be performance | |
3072 issues related to non-column zero opening braces. | |
3073 | |
3074 ** c-macro-expand is put on C-c C-e | |
3075 | |
3076 ** New style: "Default". Resets indentation to those shipped with | |
3077 cc-mode.el. | |
3078 | |
3079 ** internal defun c-indent-via-language-element has been renamed | |
3080 c-indent-line for compatibility with c-mode.el and awk-mode. | |
3081 | |
3082 ** new buffer-local variable c-comment-start-regexp for (potential) | |
3083 flexibility in adding new modes based on cc-mode.el | |
3084 | |
3085 * Changes in Emacs 19.25 | |
3086 | |
3087 The variable x-cross-pointer-shape (which didn't really exist) has | |
3088 been renamed to x-sensitive-text-pointer-shape, and now does exist. | |
3089 | |
3090 * Changes in Emacs 19.24 | |
3091 | |
3092 Here is a list of new Lisp packages introduced since 19.22. | |
3093 | |
3094 derived.el Define new major modes based on old ones. | |
3095 dired-x.el Extra Dired features. | |
3096 double.el New mode for conveniently inputting non-beyond chars. | |
3097 easymenu.el Create menus easily. | |
3098 ediff.el Snazzy diff interface. | |
3099 foldout.el A kind of outline mode designed for editing programs. | |
3100 gnus-uu.el UUdecode in GNUS buffers. | |
3101 ielm.el Interactively evaluate Lisp. | |
3102 This is a replacement for Lisp Interaction Mode. | |
3103 iso-cvt.el Conversion of beyond-ASCII characters between | |
3104 various different representations. | |
3105 jka-compr.el Automatic compression/decompression. | |
3106 mldrag.el Drag modeline to change heights of windows. | |
3107 mail-hist.el Provides history for headers of outgoing mail. | |
3108 rsz-mini.el Automatically resizing minibuffers. | |
3109 s-region.el Set region by holding shift. | |
3110 skeleton.el Templates for statement insertion. | |
3111 soundex.el Classifying words by how they sound. | |
3112 tempo.el Template insertion with hotspots. | |
3113 | |
3114 * User Editing Changes in 19.23. | |
3115 | |
3116 ** Emacs 19.23 uses Ispell version 3. | |
3117 | |
3118 Previous Emacs 19 versions used Ispell version 4. That version had | |
3119 improvements in storing the dictionary compactly, but these are not | |
3120 very important nowadays. Meanwhile, in parallel to the work on Ispell | |
3121 4, many useful features were added to Ispell 3. Until a few months | |
3122 ago, the terms on Ispell 3 did not let us use it; but they have now | |
3123 been changed, so now we are using it. We are dropping Ispell 4. | |
3124 | |
3125 ** Emacs 19.23 can run on MS-DOG. See the file MSDOS in the same | |
3126 directory as this file. | |
3127 | |
3128 ** Emacs 19.23 can work with an X toolkit. You must specify toolkit | |
3129 operation when you configure Emacs: use the option | |
3130 --with-x-toolkit=yes. (This option uses code developed by Lucid; | |
3131 thanks to Frederic Pierresteguy for helping to adapt it.) | |
3132 | |
3133 ** Emacs now has dialog boxes; yes/no and y/n questions automatically | |
3134 use them in commands invoked with the mouse. For more information, | |
3135 see below under "Lisp programming changes". | |
3136 | |
3137 ** Menus now display the keyboard equivalents (if any) of the menu | |
3138 commands in parentheses after the menu item. | |
3139 | |
3140 ** Kill commands, used in a read-only buffer, now move point across | |
3141 the text they would otherwise have killed. This way, you can use | |
3142 repeated kill commands to transfer text into the kill ring. | |
3143 | |
3144 ** There is now a global mark ring in addition to the mark ring that is local | |
3145 to each buffer. The global mark ring stores positions in any buffer. Any | |
3146 time the mark is set and the current buffer is different from the last time | |
3147 the mark was set, the new mark is pushed on the global mark ring as well. | |
3148 The new command C-x C-SPC (pop-global-mark) pops the global mark ring and | |
3149 jumps to the last mark pushed, first switching to that buffer. | |
3150 | |
3151 ** Query Replace is now available in the Edit menu. | |
3152 | |
3153 ** ESC no longer simply exits a Query Replace. It now exits the Query | |
3154 Replace and remains pending. Thus, ESC A and M-A are now equivalent | |
3155 in Query Replace. | |
3156 | |
3157 To simply exit a Query Replace, type RET or Period. | |
3158 | |
3159 ** M-mouse-2 now puts point at the end of the yanked secondary selection. | |
3160 | |
3161 ** Mouse-1 in the mode line now simply selects the window above that | |
3162 mode line. Mouse-2 in the mode line selects that window and expands | |
3163 it to fill the frame it is in. | |
3164 | |
3165 ** You can now use mouse-2 in a Dired buffer or Tar mode buffer to find | |
3166 a file you click on, in a compilation buffer to go to a particular | |
3167 error message, and in a *Occur* buffer to go to a particular | |
3168 occurrence. | |
3169 | |
3170 (It was already possible to do likewise in Info and in completion list | |
3171 buffers.) | |
3172 | |
3173 What's more, the sensitive areas of the buffer now highlight when you | |
3174 move the mouse over them. | |
3175 | |
3176 ** In a completion list buffer, the command RET now chooses the completion | |
3177 that is around or next to point. | |
3178 | |
3179 ** If you specify the foreground color for the `mode-line' face, and | |
3180 mode-line-inverse-video is non-nil, then the default background color | |
3181 is the usual foreground color. | |
3182 | |
3183 ** revert-buffer now preserves markers pointing within the unchanged | |
3184 text (if any) at the beginning and end of the file. | |
3185 | |
3186 ** Version control checkin and checkout preserve all markers if the | |
3187 file does not contain any of the magic version header sequences that | |
3188 are updated automatically by RCS and SCCS. If such version headers | |
3189 are present, checkin and checkout preserve a marker unless it comes | |
3190 between two such sequences. (So it's a good idea to put all the | |
3191 header sequences close together.) | |
3192 | |
3193 ** When a large deletion shuts off auto save temporarily in a buffer, | |
3194 you can now turn it on again by saving the buffer with C-x C-s (as was | |
3195 possible in Emacs 18). You can also turn it on again with M-1 M-x | |
3196 auto-save (as has been possible in Emacs 19). | |
3197 | |
3198 ** C-x r d now runs the command delete-rectangle. | |
3199 | |
3200 ** The new command imenu shows you a menu of interesting places in the | |
3201 current buffer and lets you select one; then it moves point there. | |
3202 The definition of interesting places depends on the major mode, but | |
3203 typically this includes function definitions and such. Normally, | |
3204 imenu displays the menu in a buffer; but if you bind it to a mouse | |
3205 event, it shows a mouse popup menu. | |
3206 | |
3207 ** You can make certain chosen buffers, that normally appear in a | |
3208 separate window, appear in special frames of their own. To do this, | |
3209 set special-display-buffer-names to a list of buffer names; any buffer | |
3210 whose name is in that list automatically gets a special frame when it | |
3211 is to be displayed in another window. | |
3212 | |
3213 A good value to try is ("*compilation*" "*grep*" "*TeX Shell*"). | |
3214 | |
3215 More generally, you can set special-display-regexps to a list of regular | |
3216 expressions; then each buffer whose name matches any of those regular | |
3217 expressions gets its own frame. | |
3218 | |
3219 The variable special-display-frame-alist specifies the frame | |
3220 parameters for these frames. It has a default value, so you don't | |
3221 need to set it. | |
3222 | |
3223 ** If you set sentence-end-double-space to nil, the fill commands | |
3224 expect just one space at the end of a sentence. (If you want the | |
3225 sentence commands to accept single spaces, you must modify the regexp | |
3226 sentence-end also.) | |
3227 | |
3228 ** You can suppress the startup echo area message by adding text like | |
3229 this to your .emacs file: | |
3230 | |
3231 (setq inhibit-startup-echo-area-message "YOUR-LOGIN-NAME") | |
3232 | |
3233 Simply setting inhibit-startup-echo-area-message to your login name is | |
3234 not sufficient to inhibit the message; Emacs explicitly checks whether | |
3235 .emacs contains an expression as shown above. Your login name must | |
3236 appear in the expression as a Lisp string constant. | |
3237 | |
3238 This way, you can easily inhibit the message for yourself if you wish, | |
3239 but thoughtless copying of your .emacs file will not inhibit the | |
3240 message for someone else. | |
3241 | |
3242 ** Outline minor mode now uses C-c C-o as a prefix instead of just C-c. | |
3243 | |
3244 ** In Outline mode, hide-subtree is now C-c C-d. (It was C-c C-h; but | |
3245 that is now a conventional way to ask for help about C-c commands.) | |
3246 | |
3247 ** There are two additional commands in Outline mode. | |
3248 M-x hide-sublevels | |
3249 hides all headers except the topmost N levels. | |
3250 M-x hide-other | |
3251 hides everything about the body that point is in | |
3252 plus the headers leading up from there to the top of the tree. | |
3253 | |
3254 ** In iso-transl and iso-insert, the sequences for entering A-ring and | |
3255 the AE ligature are now just A and E (plus the initial C-x 8 or Alt). | |
3256 You used to have to enter AA or AE, after the C-x 8 prefix of course. | |
3257 Likewise for lower case a-ring and ae. | |
3258 | |
3259 ** iso-transl now defines convenient Alt keys as well as the C-x 8 prefix. | |
3260 Instead of prefixing a sequence with C-x 8, you can add Alt to the | |
3261 first character of the sequence. For example, Alt-" a is now a way | |
3262 to enter an a-umlaut. | |
3263 | |
3264 ** CC mode is a greatly improved mode for C and C++. | |
3265 See the following page. | |
3266 | |
3267 ** tcl mode is a new major mode. It provides features for | |
3268 editing, indenting and running tcl programs. | |
3269 | |
3270 ** Compilation minor mode lets you parse error messages in any buffer, | |
3271 not just a normal compilation output buffer. Type M-x | |
3272 compilation-minor-mode to enable the minor mode; then C-c C-c jumps to | |
3273 the source location for the error at point, as in the `*compilation*' | |
3274 buffer. If you use compilation-minor-mode in an Rlogin buffer, it | |
3275 automatically accesses remote source files by ftp. | |
3276 | |
3277 ** Comint and shell mode changes: | |
3278 | |
3279 *** Comint modes (including Shell mode, GUD modes, etc.) now bind | |
3280 C-M-l to the command comint-show-output. This command scrolls the | |
3281 buffer to show the last batch of output from the subprogram. | |
3282 | |
3283 *** Completion in Comint modes now truly operates on the string before | |
3284 point, rather than the word that point is within. | |
3285 | |
3286 *** Comint mode file name completion ignores those files that end with a | |
3287 string in the new variable comint-completion-fignore. This variable's | |
3288 default value is nil. | |
3289 | |
3290 *** Shell mode uses the variable shell-completion-fignore to set | |
3291 comint-completion-fignore. The default value is nil, but some | |
3292 people prefer ("~" "#" "%"). | |
3293 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
3294 *** The function `comint-watch-for-password-prompt' can be used to |
25853 | 3295 suppress echoing when a subprocess asks for a password. To use it, |
3296 do this: | |
3297 | |
3298 (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions | |
3299 'comint-watch-for-password-prompt) | |
3300 | |
3301 *** You can use M-x shell-strip-ctrl-m to strip ^M characters from | |
3302 process output. | |
3303 | |
3304 *** In Shell mode, TAB now completes environment variables, if possible, | |
3305 and expands directory references. | |
3306 | |
3307 *** You can use M-x comint-run to execute any program of your choice in | |
3308 a comint mode. Some programs such as shells, rlogin, and debuggers | |
3309 have their own specialized modes; this command is one way to use | |
3310 comint to run programs for which no such specialized mode exits. (You | |
3311 can also run a shell with M-x shell and run the program of your choice | |
3312 under the shell--but that gives you the specializations of Shell | |
3313 mode.) | |
3314 | |
3315 ** When you run GUD (M-x gdb, M-x dbx, and so on), you can use TAB | |
3316 to do file name completion in the minibuffer. | |
3317 | |
3318 The "Complete" menu includes an item for directory expansion. | |
3319 | |
3320 ** GUD working with future versions of GDB will permit TAB for | |
3321 GDB-style symbol completion. This will work with GDB 4.13. | |
3322 | |
3323 ** Rmail no longer gets new mail automatically when you visit an Rmail | |
3324 file specified by name--not even if it is your primary Rmail file. To | |
3325 get new mail, type `g'. This feature is an advantage because you now | |
3326 have a choice of whether to get new mail. (This change actually | |
3327 occurred in an earlier version, but wasn't listed here then, since it | |
3328 made the code do what the documentation already said.) | |
3329 | |
3330 ** Rmail now highlights certain fields automatically, when you use X | |
3331 windows. The variable rmail-highlighted-headers controls which | |
3332 fields. | |
3333 | |
3334 ** If you set rmail-summary-window-size to an integer, Rmail uses | |
3335 a window that many lines high for the summary buffer. | |
3336 | |
3337 ** rmail-input-menu is a new command that visits an Rmail file letting | |
3338 you choose which file with a mouse menu. rmail-output-menu is | |
3339 similar; it outputs the current message, using a mouse menu to choose | |
3340 which Rmail file. These commands use the variables | |
3341 rmail-secondary-file-directory and rmail-secondary-file-regexp. | |
3342 | |
3343 ** The mh-e package has been changed substantially. | |
3344 See the file ./MH-E-NEWS for details. | |
3345 | |
3346 ** The calendar and diary have new features. | |
3347 | |
3348 The menu bar for the calendar contains most of the calendar commands, | |
3349 arranged into logical categories. | |
3350 | |
3351 Mouse-2 now performs specific-date-related commands when clicked on a | |
3352 date in the calendar window and common three-month-related commands | |
3353 when clicked elsewhere in the calendar window. | |
3354 | |
3355 You can set up colored/shaded highlighting of holidays, diary entry | |
3356 dates, and today's date, by setting calendar-holiday-marker, | |
3357 diary-entry-marker, and calendar-today-marker to a face instead of a | |
3358 character. Using a special face is now the default if you are using a | |
3359 window system. | |
3360 | |
3361 ** The appt package for displaying appointment reminders has new | |
3362 features. | |
3363 | |
3364 *** The appt alarm window stays for the full duration of | |
3365 appt-display-duration. It no longer disappears when you start typing | |
3366 text. | |
3367 | |
3368 *** You can change the way the appointment window is created/deleted by | |
3369 setting the variables appt-disp-window-function and | |
3370 appt-delete-window-function. | |
3371 | |
3372 For instance, these variables can be set to functions that display | |
3373 appointments in pop-up frames, which are lowered or iconified after | |
3374 appt-display-duration seconds. | |
3375 | |
3376 ** desktop.el can now save a list of buffer-local variables, | |
3377 and saves more global ones. | |
3378 | |
3379 ** Pascal mode has been completely rewritten. It now features | |
3380 completing of function names, variables and type definitions around | |
3381 current point (like M-TAB does with lisp-symbols). There's also an | |
3382 outline mode (M-x pascal-outline) that hides the bodies of all | |
3383 functions you're not working with. | |
3384 | |
3385 ** Edebug has a number of changes: | |
3386 | |
3387 *** Edebug syntax error reporting is improved. | |
3388 | |
3389 *** Top-level forms and defining forms other than defun and defmacro may | |
3390 now be debugged with Edebug. | |
3391 | |
3392 *** Edebug specifications may now contain body, &define, name, arg or | |
3393 arglist, def-body, and def-form, to support definitions. | |
3394 | |
3395 *** edebug-all-defuns is renamed to edebug-all-defs. | |
3396 def-edebug-form-spec is replaced by def-edebug-form whose arguments | |
3397 are unevaluated. The old names are still available for now. | |
3398 | |
3399 *** Frequency counts and coverage data may be displayed for functions being | |
3400 debugged. | |
3401 | |
3402 *** A global break condition is now checked at every stop point. | |
3403 | |
3404 *** The previous condition at a breakpoint may now be edited. | |
3405 | |
3406 *** A new "next" mode stops only after expression evaluation. | |
3407 | |
3408 *** A new command, top-level-nonstop, does not even stop for unwind-protect, | |
3409 as top-level would. | |
3410 | |
3411 * Changes in CC mode in Emacs 19.23. | |
3412 | |
3413 `cc-mode' provides ANSI C, K&R C, and ARM C++ language editing. It | |
3414 represents the merge of c++-mode.el and c-mode.el. cc-mode provides a | |
3415 new, more flexible indentation engine so that indentation | |
3416 customization is more intuitive. There are two steps to calculating | |
3417 indentation: first, CC mode analyzes the line for syntactic content, | |
3418 then based on this content it applies user defined offsets and adds | |
3419 this offset to the indentation of some previous line. | |
3420 | |
3421 The syntactic analysis determines if the line describes a `statement', | |
3422 `substatement', `class-open', `member-init-intro', etc. These are | |
3423 described in detail with C-h v c-offsets-alist. You can change the | |
3424 offsets interactively with C-c C-o (c-set-offsets), or | |
3425 programmatically in your c-mode-common-hook, which is run both by | |
3426 c-mode and c++-mode. You can also set up "styles" in the same way | |
3427 that you could with c-mode.el. The variable c-basic-offset controls | |
3428 the basic offset given to a level of indentation. | |
3429 | |
3430 If, for example, you wanted to change this style: | |
3431 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
3432 int foo (int i) |
25853 | 3433 { |
3434 switch (i) { | |
3435 case 1: | |
3436 printf ("its a foo\n"); | |
3437 break; | |
3438 default: | |
3439 printf ("don't know what it is\n"); | |
3440 break; | |
3441 } | |
3442 } | |
3443 | |
3444 into this: | |
3445 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
3446 int foo (int i) |
25853 | 3447 { |
3448 switch (i) { | |
3449 case 1: | |
3450 printf ("its a foo\n"); | |
3451 break; | |
3452 default: | |
3453 printf ("don't know what it is\n"); | |
3454 break; | |
3455 } | |
3456 } | |
3457 | |
3458 you could add the following to your .emacs file: | |
3459 | |
3460 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
3461 (c-set-offset 'case-label 2) | |
3462 (c-set-offset 'statement-case-intro 2)) | |
3463 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
3464 | |
3465 ** New variables: | |
3466 | |
3467 c-offsets-alist contains an association list of syntactic symbols and | |
3468 their relative offsets. Do a "C-h v c-offsets-alist" to get a list of | |
3469 all syntactic symbols currently defined, and their meanings. You | |
3470 should not change this variable directly; use the supplied interface | |
3471 commands c-set-offset and c-set-style. | |
3472 | |
3473 c-mode-common-hook is run by both c-mode and c++-mode during their | |
3474 common initializations. You should put any customizations that are | |
3475 the same for both C and C++ into this hook. | |
3476 | |
3477 The variable c-strict-semantics-p is used mainly for debugging. When | |
3478 non-nil, CC mode signals an error if it returns a syntactic symbol | |
3479 that can't be found in c-offsets-alist. | |
3480 | |
3481 If you want CC mode to echo the syntactic analysis for a particular | |
3482 line when you hit the TAB key, set c-echo-semantic-information-p to | |
3483 non-nil. | |
3484 | |
3485 c-basic-offset controls the standard amount of offset for a level of | |
3486 indentation. You can set a syntactic symbol's offset to + or - as a | |
3487 short-hand for positive or negative c-basic-offset. | |
3488 | |
3489 c-comment-only-line-offset lets you control indentation given to lines | |
3490 which contain only a comment, in the case of C++ line style comments, | |
3491 or the introduction to a C block comment. Comment-only lines at | |
3492 column zero can be anchored there independent of the indentation given | |
3493 to other comment-only lines. | |
3494 | |
3495 c-block-comments-indent-p controls the style of C block comment | |
3496 re-indentation. If you put leading stars in front of comment | |
3497 continuation lines, you should set this variable to nil. | |
3498 | |
3499 c-cleanup-list is a list describing certain C and C++ constructs to be | |
3500 "cleaned up" as they are typed, but only when the auto-newline feature | |
3501 is turned on. In C++, make sure this variable contains at least | |
3502 'scope-operator so that double colons will not be separated by a | |
3503 newline. | |
3504 | |
3505 Colons (`:') and braces (`{` and `}') are special in C and C++. For | |
3506 certain constructs, you may like them to hang on the right edge of the | |
3507 code, or you may like them to start a new line of code. You can use | |
3508 the two variables c-hanging-braces-alist and c-hanging-colons-alist | |
3509 to control whether newlines are placed before and/or after colons and | |
3510 braces when certain C and C++ constructs are entered. For example, | |
3511 you can control whether the colon that introduces a C++ member | |
3512 initialization list hangs on the right edge, starts a new line, or has | |
3513 no newlines either before or after it. | |
3514 | |
3515 c-special-indent-hook is run after a line is indented by CC mode. You | |
3516 can perform any custom indentations here. | |
3517 | |
3518 c-delete-function is the function that is called when a single | |
3519 character is deleted with the c-electric-delete command (DEL). | |
3520 | |
3521 c-electric-pound-behavior describes what happens when you enter the | |
3522 `#' that introduces a cpp macro. | |
3523 | |
3524 If c-tab-always-indent is neither t nor nil, then TAB inserts a tab | |
3525 when within strings, comments, and cpp directives, but it reindents | |
3526 the line unconditionally. | |
3527 | |
3528 c-inhibit-startup-warnings-p inhibits warnings about any old | |
3529 version of Emacs you might be running, which could be incompatible | |
3530 with cc-mode. | |
3531 | |
3532 ** There are two new minor-mode features in CC mode: auto-newline and | |
3533 hungry-delete. Auto-newline inserts newlines automatically as you | |
3534 type certain constructs. Hungry-delete consumes all preceding | |
3535 whitespace (spaces, tabs, and newlines) when the delete key is hit. | |
3536 You can toggle auto-newline on and off on a per-buffer basis by | |
3537 hitting C-c C-a. You can toggle hungry-delete on and off by hitting | |
3538 C-c C-d. You can toggle them both on and off together with C-c C-t. | |
3539 | |
3540 ** Slash (`/') and star (`*') are now both electric characters. | |
3541 | |
3542 ** New commands: | |
3543 | |
3544 The new C-c C-o (c-set-offset) command can be used to interactively change | |
3545 the offset for a particular syntactic symbol. | |
3546 | |
3547 The new command C-c : (c-scope-operator) inserts the C++ scope operator in | |
3548 c++-mode only. | |
3549 | |
3550 The new command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) indents the entire enclosing | |
3551 top-level function or class. | |
3552 | |
3553 The new command C-c C-s (c-show-semantic-information) echos the current | |
3554 syntactic analysis without re-indenting the current line. | |
3555 | |
3556 The new commands M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature and M-x | |
3557 c-backward-into-nomenclature (currently otherwise unbound to a key | |
3558 sequence), make movement easier when using the C++ variable naming | |
3559 convention of VariableNamesWithoutUnderscoresButEachWordCapitalized. | |
3560 | |
3561 ** Command from c-mode.el that have been renamed in cc-mode.el: | |
3562 | |
3563 electric-c-brace => c-electric-brace | |
3564 electric-c-semi => c-electric-semi&comma | |
3565 electric-c-sharp-sign => c-electric-pound | |
3566 mark-c-function => c-mark-function | |
3567 electric-c-terminator => c-electric-colon | |
3568 indent-c-exp => c-indent-exp | |
3569 set-c-style => c-set-style | |
3570 | |
3571 ** Variables from c-mode.el that are obsolete with cc-mode.el: | |
3572 | |
3573 c-indent-level | |
3574 c-brace-imaginary-offset | |
3575 c-brace-offset | |
3576 c-argdecl-indent | |
3577 c-label-offset | |
3578 c-continued-statement-offset | |
3579 c-continued-brace-offset | |
3580 | |
3581 * Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.23. | |
3582 | |
3583 ** To pop up a dialog box, call x-popup-dialog. | |
3584 It takes two arguments, POSITION and CONTENTS. | |
3585 | |
3586 POSITION specifies which frame to place the dialog box over; | |
3587 the dialog box always goes on the center of the frame. | |
3588 POSITION may be a mouse event, a window, a frame, | |
3589 or t meaning use the frame that the mouse is in. | |
3590 | |
3591 CONTENTS specifies the contents of the dialog box. | |
3592 It looks like a single pane of a popup menu: | |
3593 (TITLE ITEM1 ITEM2 ...), where each ITEM has the form (STRING . VALUE). | |
3594 The return value is VALUE from the chosen item. | |
3595 | |
3596 An ITEM may also be just a string--that makes a nonselectable item. | |
3597 An ITEM may also be nil--that means to put all preceding items | |
3598 on the left of the dialog box and all following items on the right. | |
3599 (By default, approximately half appear on each side.) | |
3600 | |
3601 If your Emacs is not using an X toolkit, then it cannot display a | |
3602 real dialog box; so instead it displays a pop-up menu in the center | |
3603 of the frame. | |
3604 | |
3605 ** y-or-n-p, yes-or-no-p and map-y-or-n-p now use menus or dialog boxes | |
3606 to ask their question(s) if the command that is running was reached by | |
3607 a mouse event. | |
3608 | |
3609 If you want to control which way these functions work, bind the | |
3610 variable last-nonmenu-event around the call. These functions use the | |
3611 keyboard if that variable holds a keyboard event (actually, any | |
3612 non-list); they use the mouse if that variable holds a mouse event | |
3613 (actually, any list). | |
3614 | |
3615 ** The mouse-face property is now implemented, both in overlays and as | |
3616 a text property. It specifies a face to use when the mouse is in the | |
3617 range of text for which the property is specified. | |
3618 | |
3619 ** When text has a non-nil `intangible' property, you cannot move point | |
3620 within it or right before it. If you try, point actually moves to the | |
3621 end of the intangible text. Note that this means that backward-char | |
3622 is a no-op when there is an intangible character to the left of point. | |
3623 | |
3624 ** minibuffer-exit-hook is a new normal hook that is run when you | |
3625 exit the minibuffer. | |
3626 | |
3627 ** The variable x-cross-pointer-shape specifies the cursor shape to use | |
3628 when the mouse is over text that has a mouse-face property. | |
3629 | |
3630 ** The new variable interpreter-mode-alist specifies major modes to use | |
3631 for shell scripts that specify a command interpreter. Its elements | |
3632 look like (INTERPRETER . MODE); for example, ("perl" . perl-mode) is | |
3633 one element present by default. This feature applies only when the | |
3634 file name doesn't indicate which mode to use. | |
3635 | |
3636 ** If you use a minibuffer-only frame, set the variable | |
3637 minibuffer-auto-raise to t, and entering the minibuffer will then | |
3638 raise the minibuffer frame. | |
3639 | |
3640 ** If pop-up-frames is t, display-buffer now looks for an existing | |
3641 window in any visible frame, showing the specified buffer, and uses | |
3642 such a window in preference to making a new frame. | |
3643 | |
3644 ** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame, | |
3645 previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window | |
3646 and delete-windows-on, if you specify `visible' for the last argument, | |
3647 it means to consider all visible frames. | |
3648 | |
3649 ** Mouse events now give the X and Y coordinates in pixels, rather than | |
3650 in characters. You can convert these values to characters by dividing by | |
3651 the values of (frame-char-width) and (frame-char-height). | |
3652 | |
3653 ** The new functions mouse-pixel-position and set-mouse-pixel-position | |
3654 read and set the mouse position in units of pixels. The existing | |
3655 functions mouse-position and set-mouse-position continue to work with | |
3656 units of characters. | |
3657 | |
3658 ** The new function compute-motion is useful for computing the width | |
3659 of certain text when it is displayed. | |
3660 | |
3661 ** The function vertical-motion now takes an option second argument WINDOW | |
3662 which says which window to use for the display calculations. | |
3663 | |
3664 vertical-motion always operates on the current buffer. | |
3665 It is ok to specify a window displaying some other buffer. | |
3666 Then vertical-motion uses the width, hscroll and display-table of | |
3667 the specified window, but still scans the current buffer. | |
3668 | |
3669 ** An error no longer sets last-command to t; the value of last-command | |
3670 does reflect the previous command (the one that got an error). | |
3671 | |
3672 If you do not want a particular command to be recognized as the | |
3673 previous command in the case where it got an error, you must code that | |
3674 command to prevent this. Set this-command to t at the beginning of | |
3675 the command, and set this-command back to its proper value at the end, | |
3676 like this: | |
3677 | |
3678 (defun foo (args...) | |
3679 (interactive ...) | |
3680 (setq this-command t) | |
3681 ...do the work... | |
3682 (setq this-command 'foo)) | |
3683 | |
3684 or like this: | |
3685 | |
3686 (defun foo (args...) | |
3687 (interactive ...) | |
3688 (let ((old-this-command this-command)) | |
3689 (setq this-command t) | |
3690 ...do the work... | |
3691 (setq this-command old-this-command))) | |
3692 | |
3693 The undo and yank commands do this. | |
3694 | |
3695 ** If you specify an explicit title for a new frame when you create it, | |
3696 the title is used as the resource name when looking up X resources to | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
3697 control the shape of that frame. If you don't specify the frame title, |
25853 | 3698 the value of x-resource-name is used, as before. |
3699 | |
3700 ** The frame parameter user-position, if non-nil, says that the user | |
3701 has specified the frame position. Emacs reports this to the window | |
3702 manager, to tell it not to override the position that the user | |
3703 specified. | |
3704 | |
3705 ** Major modes can now set change-major-mode-hook to arrange for state | |
3706 to be cleaned up when the user switches to a new major mode. The function | |
3707 kill-all-local-variables runs this hook. For best results, make the hook a | |
3708 buffer-local variable so that it will disappear after doing its job and will | |
3709 not interfere with the subsequent major mode. | |
3710 | |
3711 ** The new variable overriding-local-map, if non-nil, specifies a keymap | |
3712 that overrides the current local map, all minor mode keymaps, and all | |
3713 text property keymaps. Incremental search uses this feature to override | |
3714 all other keymaps temporarily. | |
3715 | |
3716 ** A key definition in a menu keymap can now have additional structure: | |
3717 in addition to (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] . COMMAND) which was allowed | |
3718 before, the form (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] (...) . COMMAND) is | |
3719 allowed. (HELPSTRING is optional, and is not currently used.) | |
3720 | |
3721 Here (...) represents a sublist containing information about keyboard | |
3722 key sequences that run the same command COMMAND. Displaying the menu | |
3723 automatically creates and updates the sublist when appropriate; you | |
3724 need never set these up yourself. | |
3725 | |
3726 lookup-key, key-binding, and similar functions return just COMMAND, | |
3727 not the whole binding. | |
3728 | |
3729 To precompute this information for a given keymap, you can do | |
3730 (x-popup-menu nil KEYMAP). | |
3731 | |
3732 ** When you specify coordinates for x-popup-menu as a list ((XOFFSET | |
3733 YOFFSET) WINDOW), the coordinates are now measured in pixels. | |
3734 | |
3735 ** where-is-internal now takes just four arguments: | |
3736 DEFINITION KEYMAP FIRSTONLY NOINDIRECT. | |
3737 The single argument KEYMAP replaces two arguments KEYMAP and KEYMAP1. | |
3738 | |
3739 If KEYMAP is non-nil, where-is-internal searches only KEYMAP and the | |
3740 global keymap. | |
3741 | |
3742 If KEYMAP is nil, where-is-internal searches all the currently active | |
3743 keymaps, but finds the active keymaps as if overriding-local-map were | |
3744 nil. | |
3745 | |
3746 If you pass a list of the form (keymap) as KEYMAP, where-is-internal | |
3747 searches only the global map. (This is not a special case--it follows | |
3748 from the specifications above.) | |
3749 | |
3750 If you pass the value of overriding-local-map as KEYMAP, where-is-internal | |
3751 searches in exactly the same was as command execution does. | |
3752 | |
3753 ** Use the macro define-derived-mode to define a new major mode that | |
3754 inherits the definition of another major mode. Here's how to define a | |
3755 command named hypertext-mode that inherits from the command text-mode: | |
3756 | |
3757 (define-derived-mode hypertext-mode text-mode "Hypertext" | |
3758 "Major mode for hypertext.\n\n\\{hypertext-mode-map}" | |
3759 (setq case-fold-search nil)) | |
3760 | |
3761 (define-key hypertext-mode-map [down-mouse-3] 'do-hyper-link) | |
3762 | |
3763 The new mode has its own keymap, which inherits from that of the | |
3764 original mode. It also has its own syntax and abbrev tables, which | |
3765 are initialized by copying those of the original mode. It also has | |
3766 its own mode hook. All are given names made by appending a suffix | |
3767 to the name of the new mode. | |
3768 | |
3769 ** A syntax table can now inherit the data for some characters from | |
3770 standard-syntax-table, while specifying other characters itself. | |
3771 Syntax code 13 means "inherit this character from the standard syntax | |
3772 table." In modify-syntax-entry, the character `@' represents this code. | |
3773 | |
3774 The function `make-syntax-table' now creates a syntax table which | |
3775 inherits all letters and control characters (0 to 31 and 128 to 255) | |
3776 from the standard syntax table, while copying the other characters | |
3777 from the standard syntax table. Most syntax tables in Emacs are set | |
3778 up this way. | |
3779 | |
3780 This sort of inheritance is useful for people who set up character | |
3781 sets with additional alphabetic characters in the range 128 to 255. | |
3782 Just changing the standard syntax for these characters affects all | |
3783 major modes. | |
3784 | |
3785 ** The new function transpose-regions swaps two regions of the buffer. | |
3786 It preserves the markers in those two regions, so that they stay with | |
3787 the surrounding text as it is swapped. | |
3788 | |
3789 ** revert-buffer now runs before-revert-hook at the beginning and | |
3790 after-revert-hook at the end. These can be used by minor modes | |
3791 that need to clean up state variables. | |
3792 | |
3793 ** The new function get-char-property is like get-text-property, but | |
3794 checks for overlays with properties as well as for text properties. | |
3795 It checks for overlays first, in order of descending priority, and | |
3796 text properties last. | |
3797 | |
3798 get-char-property allows windows as the OBJECT argument, as well | |
3799 as buffers and strings. If you specify a window, then only overlays | |
3800 active on that window are considered. | |
3801 | |
3802 ** Overlays can have the `invisible' property. | |
3803 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
3804 ** The function insert-file-contents now takes an optional fifth |
25853 | 3805 argument called REPLACE. If this is t, it means to replace the |
3806 contents of the buffer (actually, just the accessible portion) | |
3807 with the contents of the file. | |
3808 | |
3809 This is better than simply deleting and inserting the whole thing | |
3810 because (1) it preserves some marker positions and (2) it puts less | |
3811 data in the undo list. | |
3812 | |
3813 ** The variable inhibit-first-line-modes-regexps specifies classes of | |
3814 file names for which -*- on the first line should not be looked for. | |
3815 | |
3816 ** The variables before-change-functions and after-change-functions | |
3817 hold lists of functions to call before and after a change in the | |
3818 buffer's text. They work much like before-change-function and | |
3819 after-change-function, except that they hold a list of functions | |
3820 instead of just one. | |
3821 | |
3822 These variables will eventually make before-change-function and | |
3823 after-change-function obsolete. | |
3824 | |
3825 ** The variable kill-buffer-query-functions holds a list of functions | |
3826 to be called with no arguments when a buffer is about to be killed. | |
3827 (That buffer is the current buffer when the function is called.) | |
3828 If any of the functions returns nil, the buffer is not killed | |
3829 (and the remaining functions in the list are not called). | |
3830 | |
3831 ** The variable kill-emacs-query-functions holds a list of functions | |
3832 to be called with no arguments when you ask to exit Emacs. | |
3833 If any of the functions returns nil, the exit is canceled | |
3834 (and the remaining functions in the list are not called). | |
3835 | |
3836 ** The argument for buffer-disable-undo is now optional, | |
3837 like the argument for buffer-enable-undo. | |
3838 | |
3839 ** The new variable system-configuration holds the canonical three-part | |
3840 GNU configuration name for which Emacs was built. | |
3841 | |
3842 ** The function system-name now tries harder to return a fully qualified | |
3843 domain name. | |
3844 | |
3845 ** The variable emacs-major-version holds the major version number | |
3846 of Emacs. (Currently 19.) | |
3847 | |
3848 ** The variable emacs-minor-version holds the minor version number | |
3849 of Emacs. (Currently 23.) | |
3850 | |
3851 ** The default value of comint-input-autoexpand is now nil. | |
3852 However, Shell mode sets it from the value of shell-input-autoexpand, | |
3853 whose default value is `history'. | |
3854 | |
3855 ** The new function set-process-window-size specifies the terminal window | |
3856 size for a subprocess. On some systems it sends the subprocess a signal | |
3857 to let it know that the size has changed. | |
3858 | |
3859 ** %P is a new way to display a percentage in the mode line. It | |
3860 displays the percentage of the buffer text that is above the *bottom* | |
3861 of the window (which includes the text visible, in the window as well | |
3862 as the text above the top). It displays `Top' as well as the | |
3863 percentage if the top of the buffer is visible on screen. | |
3864 | |
3865 ** %+ in the mode line specs displays `*' if the buffer is modified, | |
3866 and otherwise `-'. It never displays `%', as `%*' would do; whether the | |
3867 buffer is read-only has no effect on %+. | |
3868 | |
3869 ** The new functions ffloor, fceiling, fround and ftruncate take a | |
3870 floating point argument and return a floating point result whose value | |
3871 is a nearby integer. ffloor returns the nearest integer below; fceiling, | |
3872 the nearest integer above; ftruncate, the nearest integer in the | |
3873 direction towards zero; fround, the nearest integer. | |
3874 | |
3875 ** Setting `print-escape-newlines' to a non-nil value now also makes | |
3876 formfeeds print as ``\f''. | |
3877 | |
3878 ** auto-mode-alist now has a new feature. If an element has the form | |
3879 (REGEXP FUNCTION t), and REGEXP matches the file name, then after calling | |
3880 FUNCTION, Emacs deletes the part of the file name that matched REGEXP | |
3881 and then searches auto-mode-alist again for a new match. | |
3882 | |
3883 This is useful for uncompression packages. An entry of this sort for | |
3884 .gz can uncompress the file and then put the uncompressed file in the | |
3885 proper mode according to the name sans .gz. | |
3886 | |
3887 ** The new function emacs-pid returns the process ID number of Emacs. | |
3888 | |
3889 ** user-login-name now consistently checks the LOGNAME environment | |
3890 variable before USER. user-original-login-name is obsolete, since it | |
3891 provides the same functionality. To ignore the environment variables, | |
3892 use user-real-login-name. | |
3893 | |
3894 ** There is a more general way of handling the system-specific X | |
3895 keysyms. Set the variable system-key-alist to an alist containing | |
3896 elements of the form (CODE . SYMBOL), where CODE is the numeric keysym | |
3897 code minus the "vendor specific" bit, and symbol is the name for the | |
3898 function key. | |
3899 | |
3900 ** You can use the variable command-line-functions to set up functions | |
3901 to process unrecognized command line arguments. The variable's value | |
3902 should be a list of functions of no arguments. The functions are | |
3903 called successively until one of them returns non-nil. | |
3904 | |
3905 Each function should access the free variables argi (the current | |
3906 argument) and command-line-args-left (the remaining arguments). The | |
3907 function should return non-nil only if it recognizes and processes the | |
3908 argument in argi. If it does so, it may consume following arguments | |
3909 as well by removing them from command-line-args-left. | |
3910 | |
3911 ** There's a new way for a magic file name handler to run a primitive | |
3912 and inhibit handling of the file name. Here is how to do it: | |
3913 | |
3914 (let ((inhibit-file-name-handlers | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
3915 (cons 'ange-ftp-file-handler |
25853 | 3916 (and (eq inhibit-file-name-operation operation) |
3917 inhibit-file-name-handlers))) | |
3918 (inhibit-file-name-operation operation)) | |
3919 (apply this-operation args)) | |
3920 | |
3921 The function find-file-name-handler now takes two arguments. The | |
3922 second argument is OPERATION, the operation for which the handler is | |
3923 being sought. | |
3924 | |
3925 People have suggested that the second argument should be optional, for | |
3926 backward compatibility. It would be nice if that were possible, but | |
3927 it is not. There is simply no way for find-file-name-handler to do | |
3928 the right thing without receiving the proper value for its second | |
3929 argument. | |
3930 | |
3931 ** The variable completion-regexp-list affects the completion | |
3932 primitives try-completion and all-completions. They consider | |
3933 only the possible completions that match each regexp in the list. | |
3934 | |
3935 ** Case conversion in the function replace-match has been changed. | |
3936 | |
3937 The old behavior was this: if any word in the old text was | |
3938 capitalized, replace-match capitalized each word of the replacement | |
3939 text. | |
3940 | |
3941 The new behavior is this: if the first word in the old text is capitalized, | |
3942 replace-match capitalizes the first word of the replacement text. | |
3943 | |
3944 ** You can now specify a case table with CANON non-nil and EQV nil. | |
3945 Then the EQV part of the case table is deduced from CANON. | |
3946 | |
3947 ** The new function minibuffer-prompt takes no arguments and returns | |
3948 the current minibuffer prompt string. | |
3949 | |
3950 The new function minibuffer-prompt-width takes no arguments and | |
3951 returns the display width of the minibuffer prompt string. | |
3952 | |
3953 ** The new function frame-first-window returns the window at the | |
3954 upper left corner of a given frame. | |
3955 | |
3956 ** wholenump is a new alias for natnump. | |
3957 | |
3958 ** The variable installation-directory, if non-@code{nil}, names a | |
3959 directory within which to look for the `lib-src' and `etc' | |
3960 subdirectories. This is non-nil when Emacs can't find those | |
3961 directories in their standard installed locations, but can find them | |
3962 near where the Emacs executable was found. | |
3963 | |
3964 ** invocation-name and invocation-directory are now variables as well | |
3965 as functions. The variable values are the same values that the | |
3966 functions return: the Emacs program name sans directories, and the | |
3967 directory it was found in. (invocation-directory may be nil, if Emacs | |
3968 can't determine which directory it should be.) | |
3969 | |
3970 ** Installation change regarding version number counting. | |
3971 | |
3972 The version number of an Emacs executable contains three numbers. | |
3973 The first two describe the Emacs release and the third increments | |
3974 each time you build Emacs. | |
3975 | |
3976 Now the file version.el contains only the first two version numbers. | |
3977 The third component is now determined on the basis of the names of the | |
3978 existing executable files. This means that version.el is not altered | |
3979 by building Emacs. | |
3980 | |
3981 * Changes in 19.22. | |
3982 | |
3983 ** The mouse click M-mouse-2 now inserts the current secondary | |
3984 selection (from Emacs or any other X client) where you click. | |
3985 It does not move point. | |
3986 This command is called mouse-yank-secondary. | |
3987 | |
3988 mouse-kill-secondary no longer has a key binding by default. | |
3989 Clicking M-mouse-3 (mouse-secondary-save-then-kill) twice | |
3990 may be a convenient enough way of killing the secondary selection. | |
3991 Or perhaps there should be a keyboard binding for killing the | |
3992 secondary selection. Any suggestions? | |
3993 | |
3994 ** New packages: | |
3995 | |
3996 *** `icomplete' provides character-by-character information | |
3997 about what you could complete if you type TAB. | |
3998 | |
3999 *** `avoid' moves the mouse away from point so that it doesn't hide | |
4000 your typing. | |
4001 | |
4002 *** `shadowfile' helps you update files that are supposed to be stored | |
4003 identically in different places (perhaps on different machines). | |
4004 | |
4005 ** C-h p now knows about four additional keywords: data, faces, mouse, | |
4006 and matching. | |
4007 | |
4008 ** The key for starting an inferior Lisp process, in Lisp mode, | |
4009 is now C-c C-z instead of C-c C-l. | |
4010 | |
4011 ** When the VC commands ask whether to save the buffer, if you say no, | |
4012 they signal an error. This is so that you won't operate on the wrong | |
4013 data. | |
4014 | |
4015 ** ISO Accents mode now supports `"s' as a way of typing German sharp s. | |
4016 | |
4017 ** By default, comint buffers (including Shell mode and debuggers) | |
4018 no longer try to scroll to keep the cursor on the bottom line. | |
4019 This feature was added in 19.21 but did not work smoothly enough. | |
4020 | |
4021 ** Emacs now handles the window manager "delete window" operation. | |
4022 | |
4023 ** Display of buffers with text properties is much faster now. | |
4024 | |
4025 ** The feature previously announced whereby `insert' does not inherit | |
4026 text properties from surrounding text was not fully implemented | |
4027 before; but now it is. use `insert-and-inherit' if you wish to | |
4028 inherit sticky properties from the surrounding text. | |
4029 | |
4030 ** The functions next-property-change, previous-property-change, | |
4031 next-single-property-change, and previous-single-property-change | |
4032 now take one additional optional argument LIMIT that is a position at | |
4033 which to stop scanning. If scan ends without finding the property | |
4034 change sought, these functions return the specified limit. | |
4035 | |
4036 The value returned by previous-single-property-change and | |
4037 previous-property-change, when they do find a change, is now one | |
4038 greater than what it used to be. It is the position between the two | |
4039 characters whose properties differ, which is one greater than the | |
4040 position of the first character found (while scanning back) with | |
4041 different properties. | |
4042 | |
4043 * User editing changes in version 19.21. | |
4044 | |
4045 ** ISO Accents mode supports four additional characters: | |
4046 A-with-ring (entered as /A), AE ligature (entered as /E), | |
4047 and their lower-case equivalents. | |
4048 | |
4049 * User editing changes in version 19.20. | |
4050 (See following page for Lisp programming changes.) | |
4051 | |
4052 Note that some of these changes were made subsequent to the Emacs 19.20 | |
4053 editions of the Emacs manual and Emacs Lisp manual; therefore, if you | |
4054 have those editions, do read this page. | |
4055 | |
4056 ** Dragging with mouse button 1 now puts the selected region | |
4057 in the kill ring so you can paste it into other X applications. | |
4058 | |
4059 ** Double and triple clicks with button 1 now behave as in xterm, | |
4060 selecting the word or line surrounding where you click. If you drag | |
4061 after the last click, you can select a range of words or lines. | |
4062 | |
4063 ** You can use button 3 to extend a mouse-selected region, as in xterm. | |
4064 This works for regions selected either by dragging Mouse-1 or by | |
4065 multiple-clicking Mouse-1. Clicking Mouse-3 moves the end of the | |
4066 region that is (initially) nearer to where you click. | |
4067 | |
4068 If the selection was first made by multiple-clicking Mouse-1, and thus | |
4069 consists of entire words or lines, Mouse-3 preserves that state. | |
4070 | |
4071 As before, clicking Mouse-3 again in the same place kills the region | |
4072 thus selected. | |
4073 | |
4074 ** The secondary selection commands, M-Mouse-1 and M-Mouse-3, have been | |
4075 likewise modified. | |
4076 | |
4077 ** You can now search for strings and regexps using the Edit menu bar menu. | |
4078 | |
4079 ** You can now access bookmarks using the Bookmark submenu in the File | |
4080 menu in the menu bar. | |
4081 | |
4082 ** ISO Accents mode, a buffer-local minor mode, provides a convenient | |
4083 way to type certain non-ASCII characters. It makes the characters `, | |
4084 ', ", ^, ~ and / serve as modifiers for the following letter. ` and ' | |
4085 add accents, " adds an umlaut or dieresis, ^ adds a circumflex, ~ | |
4086 adds a tilde, and / adds a slash to the following letter. | |
4087 | |
4088 If the following character is not a letter, or cannot be modified as | |
4089 requested, then both characters stand for themselves. If you | |
4090 duplicate the modifier accent character, that enters the corresponding | |
4091 ISO non-spacing accent character (thus, '' enters the ISO acute-accent | |
4092 character). To enter a modifier character itself, type it followed by | |
4093 a space. | |
4094 | |
4095 This feature can be used whenever a key sequence is expected: for | |
4096 ordinary insertion, for searching, and for certain command arguments. | |
4097 | |
4098 A few special combinations: | |
4099 | |
4100 ~c => c with cedilla | |
4101 ~d => d with stroke | |
4102 ~< => left guillemot | |
4103 ~> => right guillemot | |
4104 | |
4105 ** iso-transl.el is a new library that replaces iso-insert.el. | |
4106 It defines C-x 8 as an insertion prefix for the ISO characters | |
4107 between 128 and 255, much like iso-insert, except that iso-transl | |
4108 works even in searches and help commands--wherever a key sequence | |
4109 is expected. | |
4110 | |
4111 To define case-conversion for these characters for ISO 8859/1, | |
4112 load the library iso-syntax. (This is not new.) | |
4113 | |
4114 ** M-TAB in Text mode now runs the command ispell-complete-word | |
4115 which performs completion using the spelling dictionary. | |
4116 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
4117 The spelling correction submenu now includes this command |
25853 | 4118 and another command which completes a word fragment (that is, |
4119 it doesn't assume that the text to be completed starts at the | |
4120 beginning of a word. | |
4121 | |
4122 ** In incremental search, you can use M-y to yank the most recent kill | |
4123 into the search string. | |
4124 | |
4125 ** The new function ispell-message checks the spelling of a message | |
4126 you are about to send or post. It ignores text cited from other | |
4127 messages. | |
4128 | |
4129 To automatically check all your outgoing messages, include the | |
4130 following line in your .emacs file: | |
4131 (setq news-inews-hook (setq mail-send-hook 'ispell-message)) | |
4132 | |
4133 ** There is now a separate minibuffer history list for the names of | |
4134 extended commands. This history list is used by M-x when reading | |
4135 the command name. The motivation for this is to prevent command | |
4136 names from appearing in the history used for other minibuffer | |
4137 arguments. | |
4138 | |
4139 Note that the history list for entire commands that use the minibuffer | |
4140 is a separate feature. That history list records a command with all | |
4141 its arguments, and you must use C-x ESC ESC to access it. | |
4142 | |
4143 ** You can use the new command C-x v ~ VERSION RET to examine a | |
4144 specified version of a file that is maintained with version control. | |
4145 | |
4146 ** In Indented Text mode, only blank lines now separate paragraphs. | |
4147 Indented lines continue the paragraph that is in progress. This makes | |
4148 the user option variable adaptive-fill-mode have its intended effect. | |
4149 | |
4150 ** Local variable specifications in files for variables whose names end | |
4151 in `-hook' and `-function' are now controlled by the variable | |
4152 `enable-local-eval', just like the `eval' variable. | |
4153 | |
4154 ** C-x r j (jump-to-register) when restoring a frame configuration now | |
4155 makes all unwanted frames (existing frames not mentioned in the | |
4156 configuration) invisible. | |
4157 | |
4158 If you want to delete these unwanted frames, use a prefix argument for | |
4159 C-x r j. | |
4160 | |
4161 ** You can customize the calendar to display weeks beginning on | |
4162 Monday: set the variable `calendar-week-start-day' to 1. | |
4163 | |
4164 ** Rmail changes. | |
4165 | |
4166 If you save messages to a file in Unix format while viewing a message | |
4167 with its whole header, this now copies to the file the entire header | |
4168 of each message copied. | |
4169 | |
4170 ** Comint mode changes. | |
4171 | |
4172 C-c C-e shows as much output as possible in the window. | |
4173 C-c RET copies an old input (the one at point) | |
4174 and places the copy after the latest prompt. | |
4175 C-c C-p and C-c C-n move through the buffer, stopping at places | |
4176 where the subshell prompted for input. | |
4177 C-c C-h lists the input history in a `*Help*' buffer. | |
4178 | |
4179 There are new menu bar items for completion/input/output/signal commands. | |
4180 | |
46989 | 4181 Input behavior is configurable. Variables control whether some windows |
25853 | 4182 showing the buffer scroll to the bottom before insertion. These are |
4183 `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input' and `before-change-function'. By default, | |
4184 insertion causes the selected window to scroll to the bottom before insertion | |
4185 occurs. | |
4186 | |
4187 Subprocess output now keeps point at the end of the buffer in each | |
4188 window individually if point was already at the end of the buffer in | |
4189 that window. | |
4190 | |
4191 If `comint-scroll-show-maximum-output' is non-nil (which is the | |
4192 default), then scrolling due to arrival of output tries to place the | |
4193 last line of text at the bottom line of the window, so as to show as | |
4194 much useful text as possible. (This mimics the scrolling behavior of | |
4195 many terminals.) | |
4196 | |
4197 By setting `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-output', you can opt for having | |
4198 point jump to the end of the buffer whenever output arrives--no matter | |
4199 where in the buffer point was before. If the value is `this', point | |
4200 jumps in the selected window. If the value is `all', point jumps in | |
4201 each window that shows the comint buffer. If the value is `other', | |
4202 point jumps in all nonselected windows that show the current buffer. | |
4203 The default value is nil, which means point does not jump to the end. | |
4204 | |
4205 Input history insertion is configurable. A variable controls whether only the | |
4206 first instance of successive identical inputs is stored in the input history. | |
4207 This is `comint-input-ignoredups'. | |
4208 | |
4209 Completion (bound to TAB) is now more general. Depending on context, | |
4210 completion now operates on the input history, on command names, or (as | |
4211 before) on filenames. | |
4212 | |
4213 Filename completion is configurable. Variables control whether | |
4214 file/directory suffix characters are added (`comint-completion-addsuffix'), | |
4215 whether shortest completion is acceptable when no further unambiguous | |
4216 completion is possible (`comint-completion-recexact'), and the timing of | |
4217 completion candidate listing (`comint-completion-autolist'). | |
4218 | |
4219 Comint mode now provides history expansion. Insert input using `!' | |
4220 and `^', in the same syntax that typical shells use; then type TAB. | |
4221 This searches the comint input history for a matching element, | |
4222 performs substitution if necessary, and places the result in the | |
4223 comint buffer in place of the original input. | |
4224 | |
4225 History references in the input may be expanded before insertion into | |
4226 the input ring, or on input to the interpreter (and therefore | |
4227 visibly). The variable `comint-input-autoexpand' specifies which. | |
4228 | |
4229 You can make the SPC key perform history expansion by binding | |
4230 SPC to the command `comint-magic-space'. | |
4231 | |
4232 The command `comint-dynamic-complete-variable' does variable name | |
4233 completion using the environment variables as set within Emacs. The | |
4234 variables controlling filename completion apply to variable name | |
4235 completion too. This command is normally available through the menu | |
4236 bar. | |
4237 | |
4238 ** Shell mode | |
4239 | |
4240 Paragraph motion and marking commands (default bindings M-{, M-}, M-h) operate | |
4241 on output groups (i.e., shell prompt plus associated shell output). | |
4242 | |
4243 TAB now completes commands, as well as file names and expand history. | |
4244 Commands are searched for along the path that Emacs has on startup. | |
4245 | |
4246 C-c C-f now moves forward a command (`shell-forward-command') and | |
4247 C-c C-b now moves backward a command (`shell-backward-command'). | |
4248 | |
4249 Command completion is configurable. The variables controlling | |
4250 filename completion in comint mode apply, together with a variable | |
4251 controlling whether to restrict possible completions to only files | |
4252 that are executable (`shell-command-execonly'). | |
4253 | |
4254 The input history is initialised from the file name given in the | |
4255 variable `shell-input-ring-file-name'--normally `.history' in your | |
4256 home directory. | |
4257 | |
4258 Directory tracking is more robust. It can cope with command sequences | |
4259 and forked commands, and can detect the failure of directory changing | |
4260 commands in most circumstances. It's still not infallible, of course. | |
4261 | |
46989 | 4262 You can now configure the behavior of `pushd'. Variables control |
25853 | 4263 whether `pushd' behaves like `cd' if no argument is given |
4264 (`shell-pushd-tohome'), pop rather than rotate with a numeric argument | |
4265 (`shell-pushd-dextract'), and only add directories to the directory | |
4266 stack if they are not already on it (`shell-pushd-dunique'). The | |
4267 configuration you choose should match the underlying shell, of course. | |
4268 | |
4269 * Emacs Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.20. | |
4270 | |
4271 ** A new function `remove-hook' is now used to remove a hook that you might | |
4272 have added with `add-hook'. | |
4273 | |
4274 ** There is now a Lisp pretty-printer in the library `pp'. | |
4275 | |
4276 ** The partial Common Lisp support has been entirely reimplemented. | |
4277 | |
4278 ** When you insert text using `insert', `insert-before-markers' or | |
4279 `insert-buffer-substring', text properties are no longer inherited | |
4280 from the surrounding text. | |
4281 | |
4282 When you want to inherit text properties, use the new functions | |
4283 `insert-and-inherit' or `insert-before-markers-and-inherit'. | |
4284 | |
4285 The self-inserting character command does do inheritance. | |
4286 | |
4287 ** Frame creation hooks. | |
4288 | |
4289 The function make-frame now runs the normal hooks | |
4290 before-make-frame-hook and after-make-frame-hook. | |
4291 | |
4292 ** You can now use function-key-map to make a key an alias for other | |
4293 key sequences that can vary depending on circumstances. To do this, | |
4294 give the key a definition in function-key-map which is a function | |
4295 rather than a specific expansion key sequence. | |
4296 | |
4297 If the function reads input itself, it can have the effect of altering | |
4298 the event that follows. For example, here's how to define C-c h to | |
4299 turn the character that follows into a hyper character: | |
4300 | |
4301 (define-key function-key-map "\C-ch" 'hyperify) | |
4302 | |
4303 (defun hyperify (prompt) | |
4304 (let ((e (read-event))) | |
4305 (vector (if (numberp e) | |
4306 (logior (lsh 1 20) e) | |
4307 (if (memq 'hyper (event-modifiers e)) | |
4308 e | |
4309 (add-event-modifier "H-" e)))))) | |
4310 | |
4311 (defun add-event-modifier (string e) | |
4312 (let ((symbol (if (symbolp e) e (car e)))) | |
4313 (setq symbol (intern (concat string (symbol-name symbol)))) | |
4314 (if (symbolp e) | |
4315 symbol | |
4316 (cons symbol (cdr e))))) | |
4317 | |
4318 The character translation function gets one argument, which is the | |
4319 prompt that was specified in read-key-sequence--or nil if the key | |
4320 sequence is being read by the editor command loop. In most cases | |
4321 you can just ignore the prompt value. | |
4322 | |
4323 ** Changes for reading and writing text properties. | |
4324 | |
4325 New low-level Lisp features make it possible to write Lisp programs to | |
4326 save text properties in files, and read text properties from files. | |
4327 You can program any file format you like. | |
4328 | |
4329 The variable `write-region-annotation-functions' should contain a list | |
4330 of functions to be run by `write-region' to encode text properties in | |
4331 some fashion as annotations to the text that is written. | |
4332 | |
4333 Each function in the list is called with two arguments: the start and | |
4334 end of the region to be written. These functions should not alter the | |
4335 contents of the buffer. Instead, they should return lists indicating | |
4336 annotations to write in the file in addition to the text in the | |
4337 buffer. | |
4338 | |
4339 Each function should return a list of elements of the form (POSITION | |
4340 . STRING), where POSITION is an integer specifying the relative | |
4341 position in the text to be written, and STRING is the annotation to | |
4342 add there. | |
4343 | |
4344 Each list returned by one of these functions must be already sorted in | |
4345 increasing order by POSITION. If there is more than one function, | |
4346 `write-region' merges the lists destructively into one sorted list. | |
4347 | |
4348 When `write-region' actually writes the text from the buffer to the | |
4349 file, it intermixes the specified annotations at the corresponding | |
4350 positions. All this takes place without modifying the buffer. | |
4351 | |
4352 The variable `after-insert-file-functions' should contain a list of | |
4353 functions to be run each time a file's contents have been inserted into | |
4354 a buffer. Each function receives one argument, the length of the | |
4355 inserted text; point indicates the start of that text. The function | |
4356 should make whatever changes it wants to make, then return the updated | |
4357 length of the inserted text, as it stands after those changes. The | |
4358 value returned by one function is used as the argument to the next. | |
4359 These functions should always return with point at the beginning of | |
4360 the inserted text. | |
4361 | |
4362 The intended use of `after-insert-file-functions' is for converting | |
4363 some sort of textual annotations into actual text properties. But many | |
4364 other uses may be possible. | |
4365 | |
4366 We now invite users to begin implementing Lisp programs to store and | |
4367 retrieve text properties in files, using these new primitive features, | |
4368 and thus to experiment with various data formats and find good ones. | |
4369 | |
4370 We suggest not trying to handle arbitrary Lisp objects as property | |
4371 names or property values--because a program that general is probably | |
4372 difficult to write, and slow. Instead, choose a set of possible data | |
4373 types that are reasonably flexible, and not too hard to encode. | |
4374 | |
4375 ** Comint completion. | |
4376 | |
4377 Currently comint-dynamic-complete-command (and associated variable | |
4378 comint-after-partial-pathname-command) are set by default to complete a | |
4379 filename. Other comint-mode users should have their own functions to achieve | |
4380 this. For example, gud-mode could complete debugger commands. A completion | |
4381 function is provided solely for this reason (comint-dynamic-simple-complete). | |
4382 | |
4383 Other comint-mode users should bind comint-dynamic-complete (shell-mode does | |
4384 already). | |
4385 | |
4386 ** Comint history reference expansion | |
4387 | |
4388 Currently comint-input-autoexpand is 'history, which means only expand | |
4389 history on insertion to comint-input-ring. For non-shell modes, this is | |
4390 a strange default, since non-shells will not understand history references. | |
4391 Perhaps it would be better for the variable to be 'input, which means expand | |
4392 on RET. | |
4393 | |
4394 The value 'history might possibly be wrong even for shells, since the | |
4395 expansion will be done both by comint and the underlying shell (except sh, of | |
4396 course). It would be better for expansion to be done by one or the other, | |
4397 not both since they may (ahem) disagree. Since it is silly to put a literal | |
4398 history reference into comint-input-ring, perhaps it would be better for the | |
4399 variable to be 'input too. | |
4400 | |
4401 The reason the variable is not 'input by default is that I was attempting to | |
4402 adhere to The Principle of Least Astonishment. I didn't want to shock users | |
4403 by having their input change in front of their eyes. | |
4404 | |
4405 ** Argument delimiters and Comint mode. | |
4406 | |
4407 Currently comint-delimiter-argument-list is '(), which means no strings are | |
4408 to be treated as delimiters and arguments. In shell-mode, this variable is | |
4409 set to shell-delimiter-argument-list, '("|" "&" "<" ">" "(" ")" ";"). Other | |
4410 comint-mode users should set this variable too. For example, a lisp-type | |
4411 mode might want to set this to '("." "(" ")") or some such. | |
4412 | |
4413 ** Comint output hook. | |
4414 | |
4415 There is now a hook, comint-output-filter-hook, that is run-hooks'ed by the | |
4416 output filter, comint-output-filter. This is useful for scrolling (see | |
4417 below), but also things like processing output for specific text, output | |
4418 highlighting, etc. | |
4419 | |
4420 So that such output processing may be done efficiently, there is a new | |
4421 variable, comint-last-output-start, that records the position of the start of | |
4422 the lastest output inserted into the buffer (effectively the previous value | |
4423 of process-mark). Output processing functions should process the text | |
4424 between comint-last-output-start (or perhaps the beginning of the line that | |
4425 the position lies on) and process-mark. | |
4426 | |
4427 ** Comint scrolling. | |
4428 | |
4429 There is now automatic scrolling of process windows. | |
4430 | |
4431 Currently comint-scroll-show-maximum-output is t, which means when scrolling | |
4432 output put process-mark at the bottom of the window. There is a good case | |
4433 for it to be t, since the user is likely to want to see as much output as | |
4434 possible. But, then again, there is a comint-show-maximum-output command. | |
4435 | |
4436 ** Comint history retrieval. | |
4437 | |
4438 The input following point is not deleted when moving around the input history | |
4439 (with M-p etc.). Emacs maintainers may not like this. However, I feel this | |
4440 is a useful feature. The simple remedy is to put end-of-line in before | |
4441 delete-region in comint-previous-matching-input. | |
4442 | |
4443 The input history retrieval commands still wrap-around the input ring, unlike | |
4444 Emacs command history. | |
4445 | |
4446 * Changes in version 19.19. | |
4447 | |
4448 ** The new package bookmark.el records named bookmarks: positions that | |
4449 you can jump to. Bookmarks are saved automatically between Emacs | |
4450 sessions. | |
4451 | |
4452 ** Another simpler package saveplace.el records your position in each | |
4453 file when you kill its buffer (or kill Emacs), and jumps to the same | |
4454 position when you visit the file again (even in another Emacs | |
4455 session). Use `toggle-save-place' to turn on place-saving in a given file; | |
4456 use (setq-default save-place t) to turn it on for all files. | |
4457 | |
4458 ** In Outline mode, you can now customize how to compute the level of a | |
4459 heading line. Set `outline-level' to a function of no arguments which | |
4460 returns the level, assuming point is at the beginning of a heading | |
4461 line. | |
4462 | |
4463 ** You can now specify the prefix key to use for Outline minor mode. | |
4464 (The default is C-c.) Set the variable outline-minor-mode-prefix to | |
4465 the key sequence you want to use (as a string or vector). | |
4466 | |
4467 ** In Bibtex mode, C-c e has been changed to C-c C-b. This is because | |
4468 C-c followed by a letter is reserved for users. | |
4469 | |
4470 ** The `mod' function is no longer an alias for `%', but is a separate function | |
4471 that yields a result with the same sign as the divisor. `floor' now takes an | |
4472 optional second argument, which divides the first argument before the floor is | |
4473 taken. | |
4474 | |
4475 ** `%' no longer allows floating point arguments, since the results were often | |
4476 inconsistent with integer `%'. | |
4477 | |
4478 * Changes in version 19.18. | |
4479 | |
4480 ** Typing C-z in an iconified Emacs frame now deiconifies it. | |
4481 | |
4482 ** hilit19 is a new library for automatic highlighting of parts of the | |
4483 text in the buffer, based on its meaning and context. | |
4484 | |
4485 ** Killing no longer sends the killed text to the X clipboard. | |
4486 And large strings are not put in the cut buffer either. | |
4487 The variable x-cut-buffer-max specifies the maximum number of characters | |
4488 to put in the cut buffer. | |
4489 | |
4490 ** The new command C-x 5 o (other-frame) selects different frames, | |
4491 successively, in cyclic order. It does for frames what C-x o | |
4492 does for windows. | |
4493 | |
4494 ** The command M-ESC (eval-expression) has its own command history. | |
4495 | |
4496 ** The commands M-! and M-| for running shell commands have their own | |
4497 command history. | |
4498 | |
4499 ** If the directory containing the Emacs executable has a sibling named | |
4500 `lisp', that `lisp' directory is added to the end of `load-path' | |
4501 (provided you don't override the normal value with the EMACSLOADPATH | |
4502 environment variable). This feature may make it easier to move | |
4503 an installed Emacs from place to place. | |
4504 | |
4505 ** M-x validate-tex-buffer now records the locations of mismatches | |
4506 found in the `*Occur*' buffer. You can go to that buffer and type C-c | |
4507 C-c to visit a particular mismatch. | |
4508 | |
4509 ** There are new commands in Shell mode. | |
4510 | |
4511 C-c C-n and C-c C-p move point to the next or previous shell input line. | |
4512 | |
4513 C-c C-d is now another way to send an end-of-file to the subshell. | |
4514 | |
4515 ** Changes to calendar/diary. | |
4516 | |
4517 Time zone data is now determined automatically, including the | |
4518 start/stop days and times of daylight savings time. The code now | |
4519 works correctly almost anywhere in the world. | |
4520 | |
4521 The format of the holiday specifications has changed and IS NO LONGER | |
4522 COMPATIBLE with the old (version 18) format. See the documentation of | |
4523 the variable calendar-holidays for details of the new, improved | |
4524 format. | |
4525 | |
4526 The hook `diary-display-hook' has been split into two: | |
4527 diary-display-hook which should be used ONLY for the display and | |
4528 `diary-hook' which should be used for appointment notification. If | |
4529 diary-display-hook is nil (the default), simple-diary-display is | |
4530 used. This allows the diary hooks to be correctly set with add-hook. | |
4531 | |
4532 The forms used for dates in diary entries and general display are no | |
4533 longer autoloaded, but set at load time; this means they will be set | |
4534 correctly based on values you assign to various variables. | |
4535 | |
4536 ** The functions x-rebind-key and x-rebind-keys have been deleted, | |
4537 because you can accomplish the same job by binding keys to keyboard | |
4538 macros. | |
4539 | |
4540 ** Emacs now distinguishes double and triple drag events and double and | |
4541 triple button-down events. These work analogously to double and | |
4542 triple click events. | |
4543 | |
4544 Double drag events, if not defined, convert to ordinary click events. | |
4545 Double down events, if not defined, convert first to ordinary down | |
4546 events, which are then discarded if not defined. Triple events that | |
4547 are not defined convert to the corresponding double event; if that is | |
4548 also not defined, it may convert further. | |
4549 | |
4550 ** The new function event-click-count returns the number of clicks, | |
4551 from an event which is a list. It is 1 for an ordinary click, drag, | |
4552 or button-down event, 2 for a double event, and 3 or more for a triple | |
4553 event. | |
4554 | |
4555 ** The new function previous-frame is like next-frame, but moves | |
4556 around through the set of existing frames in the opposite order. | |
4557 | |
4558 ** The post-command-hook now runs even after commands that get an error | |
4559 and return to top level. As a consequence of the same change, this | |
4560 hook also runs before Emacs reads the first command. That might sound | |
4561 paradoxical, as if this hook were the same as the pre-command-hook. | |
4562 Actually, they are not similar; the latter runs before *execution* of | |
4563 a command, but after it has been read. | |
4564 | |
4565 ** You can turn off the text property hooks that run when point moves | |
4566 to certain places in the buffer, by binding inhibit-point-motion-hooks | |
4567 to a non-nil value. | |
4568 | |
4569 ** Inserting a string with no text properties into the buffer normally | |
4570 inherits the properties of the preceding character. You can now | |
4571 control this inheritance by setting the front-sticky and | |
4572 rear-nonsticky properties of a character. | |
4573 | |
4574 If you make a character's front-sticky property t, then insertion | |
4575 before the character inherits its properties. If you make the | |
4576 rear-nonsticky property t, then insertion after the character does not | |
4577 inherit its properties. You can regard characters as normally being | |
4578 rear-sticky and not front-sticky, and this is why insertion normally | |
4579 inherits from the previous character. | |
4580 | |
4581 If neither side of an insertion is suitably sticky, then the inserted | |
4582 text gets no properties. If both sides are sticky, then the inserted | |
4583 text gets the properties of both sides, with the previous character's | |
4584 properties taking precedence when both sides have a property in | |
4585 common. | |
4586 | |
4587 You can also specify stickiness for individual properties. To do so, | |
4588 use a list of property names as the value of the front-sticky property | |
4589 or the rear-nonsticky property. For example, if a character has a | |
4590 rear-nonsticky property whose value is (face read-only), then | |
4591 insertion after the character will not inherit its face property or | |
4592 read-only property (if any), but will inherit any other properties. | |
4593 | |
4594 The merging of properties when both sides of the insertion are sticky | |
4595 takes place one property at a time. If the preceding character is | |
4596 rear-sticky for the property, and the property is non-nil, it | |
4597 dominates. Otherwise, the following character's property value is | |
4598 used if it is front-sticky for that property. | |
4599 | |
4600 ** If you give a character a non-nil `invisible' text property, the | |
4601 character does not appear on the screen. This works much like | |
4602 selective display. | |
4603 | |
4604 The details of this feature are likely to change in future Emacs | |
4605 versions. | |
4606 | |
4607 ** In Info, when you go to a node, it runs the normal hook | |
4608 Info-selection-hook. | |
4609 | |
4610 ** You can use the new function `invocation-directory' to get the name | |
4611 of the directory containing the Emacs executable that was run. | |
4612 | |
4613 ** Entry to the minibuffer runs the normal hook minibuffer-setup-hook. | |
4614 | |
4615 ** The new function minibuffer-window-active-p takes one argument, a | |
4616 minibuffer window, and returns t if the window is currently active. | |
4617 | |
4618 * Changes in version 19.17. | |
4619 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
4620 ** When Emacs displays a list of completions in a buffer, |
25853 | 4621 you can select a completion by clicking mouse button 2 |
4622 on that completion. | |
4623 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
4624 ** Use the command `list-faces-display' to display a list of |
25853 | 4625 all the currently defined faces, showing what they look like. |
4626 | |
4627 ** Menu bar items from local maps now come after the usual items. | |
4628 | |
4629 ** The Help menu bar item always comes last in the menu bar. | |
4630 | |
4631 ** If you enable Font-Lock mode on a buffer containing a program | |
4632 (certain languages such as C and Lisp are supported), everything you | |
4633 type is automatically given a face property appropriate to its | |
4634 syntactic role. For example, there are faces for comments, string | |
4635 constants, names of functions being defined, and so on. | |
4636 | |
4637 ** Dunnet, an adventure game, is now available. | |
4638 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
4639 ** Several major modes now have their own menu bar items, |
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
4640 including Dired, Rmail, and Sendmail. We would like to add |
25853 | 4641 suitable menu bar items to other major modes. |
4642 | |
4643 ** The key binding C-x a C-h has been eliminated. | |
4644 This is because it got in the way of the general feature of typing | |
4645 C-h after a prefix character. If you want to run | |
4646 inverse-add-global-abbrev, you can use C-x a - or C-x a i g instead. | |
4647 | |
4648 ** If you set the variable `rmail-mail-new-frame' to a non-nil value, | |
4649 all the Rmail commands to send mail make a new frame to do it in. | |
4650 When you send the message, or use the menu bar command not to send it, | |
4651 that frame is deleted. | |
4652 | |
4653 ** In Rmail, the o and C-o commands are now almost interchangeable. | |
4654 Both commands check the format of the file you specify, and append | |
4655 the message to it in Rmail format if it is an Rmail file, and in | |
4656 inbox file format otherwise. C-o and o are different only when you | |
4657 specify a new file. | |
4658 | |
4659 ** The function `copy-face' now takes an optional fourth argument | |
4660 NEW-FRAME. If you specify this, it copies the definition of face | |
4661 OLD-FACE on frame FRAME to face NEW-NAME on frame NEW-FRAME. | |
4662 | |
4663 ** A local map can now cancel out one of the global map's menu items. | |
4664 Just define that subcommand of the menu item with `undefined' | |
4665 as the definition. For example, this cancels out the `Buffers' item | |
4666 for the current major mode: | |
4667 | |
4668 (local-set-key [menu-bar buffer] 'undefined) | |
4669 | |
4670 ** To put global items at the end of the menu bar, use the new variable | |
4671 `menu-bar-final-items'. It should be a list of symbols--event types | |
4672 bound in the menu bar. The menu bar items for these symbols are | |
4673 moved to the end. | |
4674 | |
4675 ** The list returned by `buffer-local-variables' now contains cons-cell | |
4676 elements of the form (SYMBOL . VALUE) only for buffer-local variables | |
4677 that have values. For unbound buffer-local variables, the variable | |
4678 name (symbol) appears directly as an element of the list. | |
4679 | |
4680 ** The `modification-hooks' property of a character no longer affects | |
4681 insertion; it runs only for deletion and modification of the character. | |
4682 | |
4683 To detect insertion, use `insert-in-front-hooks' and | |
4684 `insert-behind-hooks' properties. The former runs when text is | |
4685 inserted immediately preceding the character that has the property; | |
4686 the latter runs when text is inserted immediately following the | |
4687 character. | |
4688 | |
4689 ** Buffer modification now runs hooks belonging to overlays as well as | |
4690 hooks belonging to characters. If an overlay has a | |
4691 `modification-hooks' property, it applies to any change to text in the | |
4692 overlay, and any insertion within the overlay. If the overlay has a | |
4693 `insert-in-front-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the | |
4694 beginning boundary of the overlay. If the overlay has an | |
4695 `insert-behind-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the end | |
4696 boundary of the overlay. | |
4697 | |
4698 The values of these properties should be lists of functions. Each | |
4699 function is called, receiving as arguments the overlay in question, | |
4700 followed by the bounds of the range being modified. | |
4701 | |
4702 ** The new `-name NAME' option directs Emacs to search for its X | |
4703 resources using the name `NAME', and sets the title of the initial | |
4704 frame. This argument was added for consistency with other X clients. | |
4705 | |
4706 ** The new `-xrm DATABASE' option tells Emacs to treat the string | |
4707 DATABASE as the text of an X resource database. Emacs searches | |
4708 DATABASE for resource values, in addition to the usual places. This | |
4709 argument was added for consistency with other X clients. | |
4710 | |
4711 ** Emacs now searches for X resources in the files specified by the | |
4712 XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and XAPPLRESDIR environment | |
4713 variables, emulating the functionality provided by programs written | |
4714 using Xt. Because of this change, Emacs will now notice system-wide | |
4715 application defaults files, as other X clients do. | |
4716 | |
4717 XFILESEARCHPATH and XUSERFILESEARCHPATH should be a list of file names | |
4718 separated by colons; XAPPLRESDIR should be a list of directory names | |
4719 separated by colons. | |
4720 | |
4721 Emacs searches for X resources | |
4722 + specified on the command line, with the `-xrm RESOURCESTRING' | |
4723 option, | |
4724 + then in the value of the XENVIRONMENT environment variable, | |
4725 - or if that is unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults-HOSTNAME if it exists | |
4726 (where HOSTNAME is the hostname of the machine Emacs is running on), | |
4727 + then in the screen-specific and server-wide resource properties | |
4728 provided by the server, | |
4729 - or if those properties are unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults | |
4730 if it exists, | |
4731 + then in the files listed in XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, | |
4732 - or in files named LANG/Emacs in directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR | |
4733 (where LANG is the value of the LANG environment variable), if | |
4734 the LANG environment variable is set, | |
4735 - or in files named Emacs in the directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR | |
4736 - or in ~/LANG/Emacs (if the LANG environment variable is set), | |
4737 - or in ~/Emacs, | |
4738 + then in the files listed in XFILESEARCHPATH. | |
4739 | |
4740 The paths in the variables XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and | |
4741 XAPPLRESDIR may contain %-escapes (like the control strings passed to | |
42674 | 4742 the Emacs lisp `format' function or C printf function), which Emacs expands. |
25853 | 4743 |
4744 %N is replaced by the string "Emacs" wherever it occurs. | |
4745 %T is replaced by "app-defaults" wherever it occurs. | |
4746 %S is replaced by the empty string wherever it occurs. | |
4747 %L and %l are replaced by the value of the LANG environment variable; if LANG | |
4748 is not set, Emacs does not use that directory or file name at all. | |
4749 %C is replaced by the value of the resource named "customization" | |
4750 (class "Customization"), as retrieved from the server's resource | |
4751 properties or the user's ~/.Xdefaults file, or the empty string if | |
4752 that resource doesn't exist. | |
4753 | |
4754 So, for example, | |
4755 if XFILESEARCHPATH is set to the value | |
4756 "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N", | |
4757 and the LANG environment variable is set to | |
4758 "english", | |
4759 and the customization resource is the string | |
4760 "-color", | |
4761 then, in the last step of the process described above, Emacs checks | |
4762 for resources in the first of the following files that is present and | |
4763 readable: | |
4764 /usr/lib/X11/english/app-defaults/Emacs-color | |
4765 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs-color | |
4766 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs | |
4767 If the LANG environment variable is not set, then Emacs never uses the | |
4768 first element of the path, "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C", because it | |
4769 contains the %L escape. | |
4770 | |
4771 If XFILESEARCHPATH is unset, Emacs uses the default value | |
4772 "/usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\ | |
4773 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\ | |
4774 /usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs:\ | |
4775 /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs" | |
4776 | |
4777 This feature was added for consistency with other X applications. | |
4778 | |
4779 ** The new function `text-property-any' scans the region of text from | |
4780 START to END to see if any character's property PROP is `eq' to | |
4781 VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character. | |
4782 Otherwise, it returns nil. | |
4783 | |
4784 The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to | |
4785 be examined. | |
4786 | |
4787 ** The new function `text-property-not-all' scans the region of text from | |
4788 START to END to see if any character's property PROP is not `eq' to | |
4789 VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character. | |
4790 Otherwise, it returns nil. | |
4791 | |
4792 The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to | |
4793 be examined. | |
4794 | |
4795 ** The function `delete-windows-on' now takes an optional second | |
4796 argument FRAME, which specifies which frames it should affect. | |
4797 + If FRAME is nil or omitted, then `delete-windows-on' deletes windows | |
4798 showing BUFFER (its first argument) on all frames. | |
4799 + If FRAME is t, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on the | |
4800 selected frame; other frames are unaffected. | |
4801 + If FRAME is a frame, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on | |
4802 the given frame; other frames are unaffected. | |
4803 | |
4804 | |
4805 * Changes in version 19.16. | |
4806 | |
4807 ** When dragging the mouse to select a region, Emacs now highlights the | |
4808 region as you drag (if Transient Mark mode is enabled). If you | |
4809 continue the drag beyond the boundaries of the window, Emacs scrolls | |
4810 the window at a steady rate until you either move the mouse back into | |
4811 the window or release the button. | |
4812 | |
4813 ** RET now exits `query-replace' and `query-replace-regexp'; this makes it | |
4814 more consistent with the incremental search facility, which uses RET | |
4815 to end the search. | |
4816 | |
4817 ** In C mode, C-c C-u now runs c-up-conditional. | |
4818 C-c C-n and C-c C-p now run new commands that move forward | |
4819 and back over balanced sets of C conditionals (c-forward-conditional | |
4820 and c-backward-conditional). | |
4821 | |
4822 ** The Edit entry in the menu bar has a new alternative: | |
4823 "Choose Next Paste". It gives you a menu showing the various | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
4824 strings in the kill ring; click on one to select it as the text |
25853 | 4825 to be yanked ("pasted") the next time you yank. |
4826 | |
4827 ** If you enable Transient Mark mode and set `mark-even-if-inactive' to | |
4828 non-nil, then the region is highlighted in a transient fashion just as | |
4829 normally in Transient Mark mode, but the mark really remains active | |
4830 all the time; commands that use the region can be used even if the | |
4831 region highlighting turns off. | |
4832 | |
4833 ** If you type C-h after a prefix key, it displays the bindings | |
4834 that start with that prefix. | |
4835 | |
4836 ** The VC package now searches for version control commands in the | |
4837 directories named by the variable `vc-path'; its value should be a | |
4838 list of strings. | |
4839 | |
4840 ** If you are visiting a file that has locks registered under RCS, | |
4841 VC now displays each lock's owner and version number in the mode line | |
4842 after the string `RCS'. If there are no locks, VC displays the head | |
4843 version number. | |
4844 | |
4845 ** When using X, if you load the `paren' library, Emacs automatically | |
4846 underlines or highlights the matching paren whenever point is | |
4847 next to the outside of a paren. When point is before an open-paren, | |
4848 this shows the matching close; when point is after a close-paren, | |
4849 this shows the matching open. | |
4850 | |
4851 ** The new function `define-key-after' is like `define-key', | |
4852 but takes an extra argument AFTER. It places the newly defined | |
4853 binding after the binding for the event AFTER. | |
4854 | |
4855 ** `accessible-keymaps' now takes an optional second argument, PREFIX. | |
4856 If PREFIX is non-nil, it means the value should include only maps for | |
4857 keys that start with PREFIX. | |
4858 | |
4859 `describe-bindings' also accepts an optional argument PREFIX which | |
4860 means to describe only the keys that start with PREFIX. | |
4861 | |
4862 ** The variable `prefix-help-command' hold a command to run to display help | |
4863 whenever the character `help-char' follows a prefix key and does not have | |
4864 a key binding in that context. | |
4865 | |
4866 ** Emacs now detects double- and triple-mouse clicks. A single mouse | |
4867 click produces a pair events of the form: | |
4868 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4869 (mouse-N POSITION) | |
4870 Clicking the same mouse button again, soon thereafter and at the same | |
4871 location, produces another pair of events of the form: | |
4872 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4873 (double-mouse-N POSITION 2) | |
4874 Another click will produce an event pair of the form: | |
4875 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4876 (triple-mouse-N POSITION 3) | |
4877 All the POSITIONs in such a sequence would be identical, except for | |
4878 their timestamps. | |
4879 | |
4880 To count as double- and triple-clicks, mouse clicks must be at the | |
4881 same location as the first click, and the number of milliseconds | |
4882 between the first release and the second must be less than the value | |
4883 of the lisp variable `double-click-time'. Setting `double-click-time' | |
4884 to nil disables multi-click detection. Setting it to t removes the | |
4885 time limit; Emacs then detects multi-clicks by position only. | |
4886 | |
4887 If `read-key-sequence' finds no binding for a double-click event, but | |
4888 the corresponding single-click event would be bound, | |
4889 `read-key-sequence' demotes it to a single-click. Similarly, it | |
4890 demotes unbound triple-clicks to double- or single-clicks. This means | |
4891 you don't have to distinguish between single- and multi-clicks if you | |
4892 don't want to. | |
4893 | |
4894 Emacs reports all clicks after the third as `triple-mouse-N' clicks, | |
4895 but increments the click count after POSITION. For example, a fourth | |
4896 click, soon after the third and at the same location, produces a pair | |
4897 of events of the form: | |
4898 (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4899 (triple-mouse-N POSITION 4) | |
4900 | |
4901 ** The way Emacs reports positions of mouse events has changed | |
4902 slightly. If a mouse event includes a position list of the form: | |
4903 (WINDOW (PLACE-SYMBOL) (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP) | |
4904 this denotes exactly the same position as the list: | |
4905 (WINDOW PLACE-SYMBOL (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP) | |
4906 That is, the event occurred over a non-textual area of the frame, | |
4907 specified by PLACE-SYMBOL, a symbol like `mode-line' or | |
4908 `vertical-scroll-bar'. | |
4909 | |
4910 Enclosing PLACE-SYMBOL in a singleton list does not change the | |
4911 position denoted, but the `read-key-sequence' function uses the | |
4912 presence or absence of the singleton list to tell whether or not it | |
4913 should prefix the event with its place symbol. | |
4914 | |
4915 Normally, `read-key-sequence' prefixes mouse events occurring over | |
4916 non-textual areas with their PLACE-SYMBOLs, to select the sub-keymap | |
4917 appropriate for the event; for example, clicking on the mode line | |
4918 produces a sequence like | |
4919 [mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)] | |
4920 However, if lisp code elects to unread the resulting key sequence by | |
4921 placing it in the `unread-command-events' variable, it is important | |
4922 that `read-key-sequence' not insert the prefix symbol again; that | |
4923 would produce a malformed key sequence like | |
4924 [mode-line mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)] | |
4925 For this reason, `read-key-sequence' encloses the event's PLACE-SYMBOL | |
4926 in a singleton list when it first inserts the prefix, but doesn't | |
4927 insert the prefix when processing events whose PLACE-SYMBOLs are | |
4928 already thus enclosed. | |
4929 | |
4930 | |
4931 * Changes in version 19.15. | |
4932 | |
4933 ** `make-frame-visible', which uniconified frames, is now a command, | |
4934 and thus may be bound to a key. This makes sense because frames | |
4935 respond to user input while iconified. | |
4936 | |
4937 ** You can now use Meta mouse clicks to set and use the "secondary | |
4938 selection". You can drag M-Mouse-1 across the region you want to | |
4939 select. Or you can press M-Mouse-1 at one end and M-Mouse-3 at the | |
4940 other (this also copies the text to the kill ring). Repeating M-Mouse-3 | |
4941 again at the same place kills that text. | |
4942 | |
4943 M-Mouse-2 kills the secondary selection. | |
4944 | |
4945 Setting the secondary selection does not move point or the mark. It | |
4946 is possible to make a secondary selection that does not all fit on the | |
4947 screen, by using M-Mouse-1 at one end, scrolling, then using M-Mouse-3 | |
4948 at the other end. | |
4949 | |
4950 Emacs has only one secondary selection at any time. Starting to set | |
4951 a new one cancels any previous one. The secondary selection displays | |
4952 using a face named `secondary-selection'. | |
4953 | |
4954 ** There's a new way to request use of Supercite (sc.el). Do this: | |
4955 | |
4956 (add-hook 'mail-citation-hook 'sc-cite-original) | |
4957 | |
4958 Currently this works with Rmail. In the future, other Emacs based | |
4959 mail-readers should be modified to understand this hook also. | |
4960 In the mean time, you should keep doing what you have done in the past | |
4961 for those other mail readers. | |
4962 | |
4963 ** When a regular expression contains `\(...\)' inside a repetition | |
4964 operator such as `*' or `+', and you ask about the range that was matched | |
4965 using `match-beginning' and `match-end', the range you get corresponds | |
4966 to the *last* repetition *only*. In Emacs 18, you would get a range | |
4967 corresponding to all the repetitions. | |
4968 | |
4969 If you want to get a range corresponding to all the repetitions, | |
4970 put a `\(...\)' grouping *outside* the repetition operator. This | |
4971 is the syntax that corresponds logically to the desired result, and | |
4972 it works the same in Emacs 18 and Emacs 19. | |
4973 | |
4974 (This change actually took place earlier, but we didn't know about it | |
4975 and thus didn't document it.) | |
4976 | |
4977 * Changes in version 19.14. | |
4978 | |
4979 ** To modify read-only text, bind the variable `inhibit-read-only' | |
4980 to a non-nil value. If the value is t, then all reasons that might | |
4981 make text read-only are inhibited (including `read-only' text properties). | |
4982 If the value is a list, then a `read-only' property is inhibited | |
4983 if it is `memq' in the list. | |
4984 | |
4985 ** If you call `get-buffer-window' passing t as its second argument, it | |
4986 will only search for windows on visible frames. Previously, passing t | |
4987 as the secord argument caused `get-buffer-window' to search all | |
4988 frames, visible or not. | |
4989 | |
4990 ** If you call `other-buffer' with a nil or omitted second argument, it | |
4991 will ignore buffers displayed windows on any visible frame, not just | |
4992 the selected frame. | |
4993 | |
4994 ** You can specify a window or a frame for C-x # to use when | |
4995 selects a server buffer. Set the variable server-window | |
4996 to the window or frame that you want. | |
4997 | |
4998 ** The command M-( now inserts spaces outside the open-parentheses in | |
4999 some cases--depending on the syntax classes of the surrounding | |
5000 characters. If the variable `parens-dont-require-spaces' is non-nil, | |
5001 it inhibits insertion of these spaces. | |
5002 | |
5003 ** The GUD package now supports the debugger known as xdb on HP/UX | |
5004 systems. Use M-x xdb. The variable `gud-xdb-directories' lets you | |
5005 specify a list of directories to search for source code. | |
5006 | |
5007 ** If you are using the mailabbrev package, you should note that its | |
5008 function for defining an alias is now called `define-mail-abbrev'. | |
5009 This package no longer contains a definition for `define-mail-alias'; | |
5010 that name is used only in mailaliases. | |
5011 | |
5012 ** Inserted characters now inherit the properties of the text before | |
5013 them, by default, rather than those of the following text. | |
5014 | |
5015 ** The function `insert-file-contents' now takes optional arguments BEG | |
5016 and END that specify which part of the file to insert. BEG defaults to | |
5017 0 (the beginning of the file), and END defaults to the end of the file. | |
5018 | |
5019 If you specify BEG or END, then the argument VISIT must be nil. | |
5020 | |
5021 * Changes in version 19.13. | |
5022 | |
5023 ** Magic file names can now handle the `load' operation. | |
5024 | |
5025 ** Bibtex mode now sets up special entries in the menu bar. | |
5026 | |
5027 ** The incremental search commands C-w and C-y, which copy text from | |
5028 the buffer into the search string, now convert it to lower case | |
5029 if you are in a case-insensitive search. This is to avoid making | |
5030 the search a case-sensitive one. | |
5031 | |
5032 ** GNUS now knows your time zone automatically if Emacs does. | |
5033 | |
5034 ** Hide-ifdef mode no longer defines keys of the form | |
5035 C-c LETTER, since those keys are reserved for users. | |
5036 Those commands have been moved to C-c M-LETTER. | |
5037 We may move them again for greater consistency with other modes. | |
5038 | |
5039 * Changes in version 19.12. | |
5040 | |
5041 ** You can now make many of the sort commands ignore case by setting | |
5042 `sort-fold-case' to a non-nil value. | |
5043 | |
5044 * Changes in version 19.11. | |
5045 | |
5046 ** Supercite is installed. | |
5047 | |
5048 ** `write-file-hooks' functions that return non-nil are responsible | |
5049 for making a backup file if you want that to be done. | |
5050 To do so, execute the following code: | |
5051 | |
5052 (or buffer-backed-up (backup-buffer)) | |
5053 | |
5054 You might wish to save the file modes value returned by | |
5055 `backup-buffer' and use that to set the mode bits of the file | |
5056 that you write. This is what `basic-save-buffer' does when | |
5057 it writes a file in the usual way. | |
5058 | |
5059 (This is not actually new, but wasn't documented before.) | |
5060 | |
5061 * Changes in version 19.10. | |
5062 | |
5063 ** The command `repeat-complex-command' is now on C-x ESC ESC. | |
5064 It used to be bound to C-x ESC. | |
5065 | |
5066 The reason for this change is to make function keys work after C-x. | |
5067 | |
5068 ** The variable `highlight-nonselected-windows' now controls whether | |
5069 the region is highlighted in windows other than the selected window | |
5070 (in Transient Mark mode only, of course, and currently only when | |
5071 using X). | |
5072 | |
5073 * Changes in version 19.8. | |
5074 | |
5075 ** It is now simpler to tell Emacs to display accented characters under | |
5076 X windows. M-x standard-display-european toggles the display of | |
5077 buffer text according to the ISO Latin-1 standard. With a prefix | |
5078 argument, this command enables European character display iff the | |
5079 argument is positive. | |
5080 | |
5081 ** The `-i' command-line argument tells Emacs to use a picture of the | |
5082 GNU gnu as its icon, instead of letting the window manager choose an | |
5083 icon for it. This option used to insert a file into the current | |
5084 buffer; use `-insert' to do that now. | |
5085 | |
5086 ** The `configure' script now supports `--prefix' and `--exec-prefix' | |
5087 options. | |
5088 | |
5089 The `--prefix=PREFIXDIR' option specifies where the installation process | |
5090 should put emacs and its data files. This defaults to `/usr/local'. | |
5091 - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in PREFIXDIR/bin | |
5092 (unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise). | |
5093 - The architecture-independent files go in PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION | |
5094 (where VERSION is the version number of Emacs, like `19.7'). | |
5095 - The architecture-dependent files go in | |
5096 PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION | |
5097 (where CONFIGURATION is the configuration name, like mips-dec-ultrix4.2), | |
5098 unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise. | |
5099 | |
5100 The `--exec-prefix=EXECDIR' option allows you to specify a separate | |
5101 portion of the directory tree for installing architecture-specific | |
5102 files, like executables and utility programs. If specified, | |
5103 - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in EXECDIR/bin, and | |
5104 - The architecture-dependent files go in | |
5105 EXECDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION. | |
5106 EXECDIR/bin should be a directory that is normally in users' PATHs. | |
5107 | |
5108 ** When running under X, the new lisp function `x-list-fonts' | |
5109 allows code to find out which fonts are available from the X server. | |
5110 The first argument PATTERN is a string, perhaps with wildcard characters; | |
5111 the * character matches any substring, and | |
5112 the ? character matches any single character. | |
5113 PATTERN is case-insensitive. | |
5114 If the optional arguments FACE and FRAME are specified, then | |
5115 `x-list-fonts' returns only fonts the same size as FACE on FRAME. | |
5116 | |
5117 | |
5118 | |
5119 * Changes in version 19. | |
5120 | |
5121 ** When you kill buffers, Emacs now returns memory to the operating system, | |
5122 thus reducing the size of the Emacs process. All the space that you free | |
5123 up by killing buffers can now be reused for other buffers no matter what | |
5124 their sizes, or reused by other processes if Emacs doesn't need it. | |
5125 | |
5126 ** Emacs now does garbage collection and auto saving while it is waiting | |
5127 for input, which often avoids the need to do these things while you | |
5128 are typing. | |
5129 | |
5130 The variable `auto-save-timeout' says how many seconds Emacs should | |
5131 wait, after you stop typing, before it does an auto save and a garbage | |
5132 collection. | |
5133 | |
5134 ** If auto saving detects that a buffer has shrunk greatly, it refrains | |
5135 from auto saving that buffer and displays a warning. Now it also turns | |
5136 off Auto Save mode in that buffer, so that you won't get the same | |
5137 warning again. | |
5138 | |
5139 If you reenable Auto Save mode in that buffer, Emacs will start saving | |
5140 it again with no further warnings. | |
5141 | |
5142 ** A new minor mode called Line Number mode displays the current line | |
5143 number in the mode line, updating it as necessary when you move | |
5144 point. | |
5145 | |
5146 However, if the buffer is very large (larger than the value of | |
5147 `line-number-display-limit'), then the line number doesn't appear. | |
5148 This is because computing the line number can be painfully slow if the | |
5149 buffer is very large. | |
5150 | |
5151 ** You can quit while Emacs is waiting to read or write files. | |
5152 | |
5153 ** The arrow keys now have default bindings to move in the appropriate | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
5154 directions. |
25853 | 5155 |
5156 ** You can suppress next-line's habit of inserting a newline when | |
5157 called at the end of a buffer by setting next-line-add-newlines to nil | |
5158 (it defaults to t). | |
5159 | |
5160 ** You can now get back recent minibuffer inputs conveniently. While | |
5161 in the minibuffer, type M-p to fetch the next earlier minibuffer | |
5162 input, and use M-n to fetch the next later input. | |
5163 | |
5164 There are also commands to search forward or backward through the | |
5165 history for history elements that match a regular expression. M-r | |
5166 searches older elements in the history, while M-s searches newer | |
5167 elements. By special dispensation, these commands can always use the | |
5168 minibuffer to read their arguments even though you are already in the | |
5169 minibuffer when you issue them. | |
5170 | |
5171 The history feature is available for all uses of the minibuffer, but | |
5172 there are separate history lists for different kinds of input. For | |
5173 example, there is a list for file names, used by all the commands that | |
5174 read file names. There is a list for arguments of commands like | |
5175 `query-replace'. There are also very specific history lists, such | |
5176 as the one that `compile' uses for compilation commands. | |
5177 | |
5178 ** You can now display text in a mixture of fonts and colors, using the | |
5179 "face" feature, together with the overlay and text property features. | |
5180 See the Emacs Lisp manual for details. The Emacs Users Manual describes | |
5181 how to change the colors and font of standard predefined faces. | |
5182 | |
5183 ** You can refer to files on other machines using special file name syntax: | |
5184 | |
5185 /HOST:FILENAME | |
5186 /USER@HOST:FILENAME | |
5187 | |
5188 When you do this, Emacs uses the FTP program to read and write files on | |
5189 the specified host. It logs in through FTP using your user name or the | |
5190 name USER. It may ask you for a password from time to time; this | |
5191 is used for logging in on HOST. | |
5192 | |
5193 ** Some C-x key bindings have been moved onto new prefix keys. | |
5194 | |
5195 C-x r is a prefix for registers and rectangles. | |
5196 C-x n is a prefix for narrowing. | |
5197 C-x a is a prefix for abbrev commands. | |
5198 | |
5199 C-x r C-SPC | |
5200 C-x r SPC point-to-register (Was C-x /) | |
5201 C-x r j jump-to-register (Was C-x j) | |
5202 C-x r s copy-to-register (Was C-x x) | |
5203 C-x r i insert-register (Was C-x g) | |
5204 C-x r r copy-rectangle-to-register (Was C-x r) | |
5205 C-x r k kill-rectangle | |
5206 C-x r y yank-rectangle | |
5207 C-x r o open-rectangle | |
5208 C-x r f frame-configuration-to-register | |
5209 (This saves the state of all windows in all frames.) | |
5210 C-x r w window-configuration-to-register | |
5211 (This saves the state of all windows in the selected frame.) | |
5212 | |
5213 (Use C-x r j to restore a configuration saved with C-x r f or C-x r w.) | |
5214 | |
5215 C-x n n narrow-to-region (Was C-x n) | |
5216 C-x n p narrow-to-page (Was C-x p) | |
5217 C-x n w widen (Was C-x w) | |
5218 | |
5219 C-x a l add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-a) | |
5220 C-x a g add-global-abbrev (Was C-x +) | |
5221 C-x a i l inverse-add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-h) | |
5222 C-x a i g inverse-add-global-abbrev (Was C-x -) | |
5223 C-x a e expand-abbrev (Was C-x ') | |
5224 | |
5225 (The old key bindings C-x /, C-x j, C-x x and C-x g | |
5226 have not yet been removed.) | |
5227 | |
5228 ** You can put a file name in a register to be able to visit the file | |
5229 quickly. Do this: | |
5230 | |
5231 (set-register ?CHAR '(file . NAME)) | |
5232 | |
5233 where NAME is the file name as a string. Then C-x r j CHAR finds that | |
5234 file. | |
5235 | |
5236 This is useful for files that you need to visit frequently, | |
5237 but that you don't want to keep in buffers all the time. | |
5238 | |
5239 ** The keys M-g (fill-region) and C-x a (append-to-buffer) | |
5240 have been eliminated. | |
5241 | |
5242 ** The new command `string-rectangle' inserts a specified string on | |
5243 each line of the region-rectangle. | |
5244 | |
5245 ** C-x 4 r is now `find-file-read-only-other-window'. | |
5246 | |
5247 ** C-x 4 C-o is now `display-buffer', which displays a specified buffer | |
5248 in another window without selecting it. | |
5249 | |
5250 ** Picture mode has been substantially improved. The picture editing commands | |
5251 now arrange for automatic horizontal scrolling to keep point visible | |
5252 when editing a wide buffer with truncate-lines on. Picture-mode | |
5253 initialization now does a better job of rebinding standard commands; | |
5254 it finds not just their normal keybindings, but any function keys | |
5255 attached to them. | |
5256 | |
5257 ** If you enable Transient Mark mode, then the mark becomes "inactive" | |
5258 after every command that modifies the buffer. While the mark is | |
5259 active, the region is highlighted (under X, at least). Most commands | |
5260 that use the mark give an error if the mark is inactive, but you can | |
5261 use C-x C-x to make it active again. This feature is also sometimes | |
5262 known as "Zmacs mode". | |
5263 | |
5264 ** Outline mode is now available as a minor mode. This minor mode can | |
5265 combine with any major mode; it substitutes the C-c commands of | |
5266 Outline mode for those of the major mode. Use M-x outline-minor-mode | |
5267 to enable and disable the new mode. | |
5268 | |
5269 M-x outline-mode is unchanged; it still switches to Outline mode as a | |
5270 major mode. | |
5271 | |
5272 ** The default setting of `version-control' comes from the environment | |
5273 variable VERSION_CONTROL. | |
5274 | |
5275 ** The user option for controlling whether files can set local | |
5276 variables is now called `enable-local-variables'. A value of t means | |
5277 local-variables lists are obeyed; nil means they are ignored; anything | |
5278 else means query the user. | |
5279 | |
5280 The user option for controlling use of the `eval' local variable is | |
5281 now called is `enable-local-eval'; its values are interpreted like | |
5282 those of `enable-local-variables'. | |
5283 | |
5284 ** X Window System changes: | |
5285 | |
5286 C-x 5 C-f and C-x 5 b switch to a specified file or buffer in a new | |
5287 frame. Likewise, C-x 5 m starts outgoing mail in another frame, and | |
5288 C-x 5 . finds a tag in another frame. | |
5289 | |
5290 When you are using X, C-z now iconifies the selected frame. | |
5291 | |
5292 Emacs can now exchange text with other X applications. Killing or | |
5293 copying text in Emacs now makes that text available for pasting into | |
5294 other X applications. The Emacs yanking commands now insert the | |
5295 latest selection set by other applications, and add the text to the | |
5296 kill ring. The Emacs commands for selecting and inserting text with | |
5297 the mouse now use the kill ring in the same way the keyboard killing | |
5298 and yanking commands do. | |
5299 | |
5300 The option to specify the title for the initial frame is now `-name NAME'. | |
5301 There is currently no way to specify an icon title; perhaps we will add | |
5302 one in the future. | |
5303 | |
5304 ** Undoing a deletion now puts point back where it was before the | |
5305 deletion. | |
5306 | |
5307 ** The variables that control how much undo information to save have | |
5308 been renamed to `undo-limit' and `undo-strong-limit'. They used to be | |
5309 called `undo-threshold' and `undo-high-threshold'. | |
5310 | |
5311 ** You can now use kill commands in read-only buffers. They don't | |
5312 actually change the buffer, and Emacs will beep and warn you that the | |
5313 buffer is read-only, but they do copy the text you tried to kill into | |
5314 the kill ring, so you can yank it into other buffers. | |
5315 | |
5316 ** C-o inserts the fill-prefix on the newly created line. The command | |
5317 M-^ deletes the prefix (if it occurs) after the newline that it | |
5318 deletes. | |
5319 | |
5320 ** C-M-l now runs the command `reposition-window'. It scrolls the | |
5321 window heuristically in a way designed to get useful information onto | |
5322 the screen. | |
5323 | |
5324 ** C-M-r is now reverse incremental regexp search. | |
5325 | |
5326 ** M-z now kills through the target character. In version 18, it | |
5327 killed up to but not including the target character. | |
5328 | |
5329 ** M-! now runs the specified shell command asynchronously if it | |
5330 ends in `&' (just as the shell does). | |
5331 | |
5332 ** C-h C-f and C-h C-k are new help commands that display the Info | |
5333 node for a given Emacs function name or key sequence, respectively. | |
5334 | |
5335 ** The C-h p command system lets you find Emacs Lisp packages by | |
5336 topic keywords. Here is a partial list of package categories: | |
5337 | |
5338 abbrev abbreviation handling, typing shortcuts, macros | |
5339 bib code related to the bib bibliography processor | |
5340 c C and C++ language support | |
5341 calendar calendar and time management support | |
5342 comm communications, networking, remote access to files | |
5343 docs support for Emacs documentation | |
5344 emulations emulations of other editors | |
5345 extensions Emacs Lisp language extensions | |
5346 games games, jokes and amusements | |
5347 hardware support for interfacing with exotic hardware | |
5348 help support for on-line help systems | |
5349 i14n internationalization and alternate character-set support | |
5350 internal code for Emacs internals, build process, defaults | |
5351 languages specialized modes for editing programming languages | |
5352 lisp Lisp support, including Emacs Lisp | |
5353 local code local to your site | |
5354 maint maintenance aids for the Emacs development group | |
5355 mail modes for electronic-mail handling | |
5356 news support for netnews reading and posting | |
5357 processes process, subshell, compilation, and job control support | |
5358 terminals support for terminal types | |
5359 tex code related to the TeX formatter | |
5360 tools programming tools | |
5361 unix front-ends/assistants for, or emulators of, UNIX features | |
5362 vms support code for vms | |
5363 wp word processing | |
5364 | |
5365 More will be added soon. | |
5366 | |
5367 ** The command to split a window into two side-by-side windows is now | |
5368 C-x 3. It was C-x 5. | |
5369 | |
5370 ** M-. (find-tag) no longer has any effect on what M-, will do | |
5371 subsequently. You can no longer use M-, to find the next similar tag; | |
5372 you must use M-. with a prefix argument, instead. | |
5373 | |
5374 The motive for this change is so that you can more reliably use | |
5375 M-, to resume a suspended `tags-search' or `tags-query-replace'. | |
5376 | |
5377 ** C-x s (`save-some-buffers') now gives you more options when it asks | |
5378 whether to save a particular buffer. In addition to `y' or `n', you | |
5379 can answer `!' to save all the remaining buffers, `.' to save this | |
5380 buffer but not save any others, ESC to stop saving and exit the | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
5381 command, and C-h to get help. These options are analogous to those |
25853 | 5382 of `query-replace'. |
5383 | |
5384 ** M-x make-symbolic-link does not expand its first argument. | |
5385 This lets you make a link with a target that is a relative file name. | |
5386 | |
5387 ** M-x add-change-log-entry and C-x 4 a now automatically insert the | |
5388 name of the file and often the name of the function that you changed. | |
5389 They also handle grouping of entries. | |
5390 | |
5391 There is now a special major mode for editing ChangeLog files. It | |
5392 makes filling work conveniently. Each bunch of grouped entries is one | |
5393 paragraph, and each collection of entries from one person on one day | |
5394 is considered a page. | |
5395 | |
5396 ** The `comment-region' command adds comment delimiters to the lines that | |
5397 start in the region, thus commenting them out. With a negative argument, | |
5398 it deletes comment delimiters from the lines in the region--this cancels | |
5399 the effect of `comment-region' without an argument. | |
5400 | |
5401 With a positive argument, `comment-region' adds comment delimiters | |
5402 but duplicates the last character of the comment start sequence as many | |
5403 times as the argument specifies. This is a way of calling attention to | |
5404 the comment. In Lisp, you should use an argument at least two, because | |
5405 the indentation convention for single semicolon comments does not leave | |
5406 them at the beginning of a line. | |
5407 | |
5408 ** If `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil, C-x 2 tries to avoid | |
5409 shifting any text on the screen by putting point in whichever window | |
5410 happens to contain the screen line the cursor is already on. | |
5411 The default is that `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil on slow | |
5412 terminals. | |
5413 | |
5414 ** M-x super-apropos is like M-x apropos except that it searches both | |
5415 Lisp symbol names and documentation strings for matches. It describes | |
5416 every symbol that has a match in either the symbol's name or its | |
5417 documentation. | |
5418 | |
5419 Both M-x apropos and M-x super-apropos take an optional second | |
5420 argument DO-ALL which controls the more expensive part of the job. | |
5421 This includes looking up and printing the key bindings of all | |
5422 commands. It also includes checking documentation strings in | |
5423 super-apropos. DO-ALL is nil by default; use a prefix arg to make it | |
5424 non-nil. | |
5425 | |
5426 ** M-x revert-buffer no longer offers to revert from a recent auto-save | |
5427 file unless you give it a prefix argument. Otherwise it always | |
5428 reverts from the real file regardless of whether there has been an | |
5429 auto-save since thenm. (Reverting from the auto-save file is no longer | |
5430 very useful now that the undo capacity is larger.) | |
5431 | |
5432 ** M-x recover-file no longer turns off Auto Save mode when it reads | |
5433 the last Auto Save file. | |
5434 | |
5435 ** M-x rename-buffer, if you give it a prefix argument, | |
5436 avoids errors by modifying the new name to make it unique. | |
5437 | |
5438 ** M-x rename-uniquely renames the current buffer to a similar name | |
5439 with a numeric suffix added to make it both different and unique. | |
5440 | |
5441 One use of this command is for creating multiple shell buffers. | |
5442 If you rename your shell buffer, and then do M-x shell again, it | |
5443 makes a new shell buffer. This method is also good for mail buffers, | |
5444 compilation buffers, and any Emacs feature which creates a special | |
5445 buffer with a particular name. | |
5446 | |
5447 ** M-x compare-windows with a prefix argument ignores changes in whitespace. | |
5448 If `compare-ignore-case' is non-nil, then differences in case are also | |
5449 ignored. | |
5450 | |
5451 ** `backward-paragraph' is now bound to M-{ by default, and `forward-paragraph' | |
5452 to M-}. Originally, these commands were bound to M-[ and M-], but they were | |
5453 running into conflicts with the use of function keys. On many terminals, | |
5454 function keys send a sequence beginning ESC-[, so many users have defined this | |
5455 as a prefix key. | |
5456 | |
5457 ** C-x C-u (upcase-region) and C-x C-l (downcase-region) are now disabled by | |
5458 default; these commands seem to be often hit by accident, and can be | |
5459 quite destructive if their effects are not noticed immediately. | |
5460 | |
5461 ** The function `erase-buffer' is now interactive, but disabled by default. | |
5462 | |
5463 ** When visiting a new file, Emacs attempts to abbreviate the file's | |
5464 path using the symlinks listed in `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
5465 | |
5466 ** When you visit the same file in under two names that translate into | |
5467 the same name once symbolic links are handled, Emacs warns you that | |
5468 you have two buffers for the same file. | |
5469 | |
5470 ** If you wish to avoid visiting the same file in two buffers under | |
5471 different names, set the variable `find-file-existing-other-name' | |
5472 non-nil. Then `find-file' uses the existing buffer visiting the file, | |
5473 no matter which of the file's names you specify. | |
5474 | |
5475 ** If you set `find-file-visit-truename' non-nil, then the file name | |
5476 recorded for a buffer is the file's truename (in which all symbolic | |
5477 links have been removed), rather than the name you specify. Setting | |
5478 `find-file-visit-truename' also implies the effect of | |
5479 `find-file-existing-other-name'. | |
5480 | |
5481 ** C-x C-v now inserts the entire current file name in the minibuffer. | |
5482 This is convenient if you made a small mistake in typing it. Point | |
5483 goes after the last slash, before the last file name component, so if | |
5484 you want to replace it entirely, you can use C-k right away to delete | |
5485 it. | |
5486 | |
5487 ** Commands such as C-M-f in Lisp mode now ignore parentheses within comments. | |
5488 | |
5489 ** C-x q now uses ESC to terminate all iterations of the keyboard | |
5490 macro, rather than C-d as before. | |
5491 | |
5492 ** Use the command `setenv' to set an individual environment variable | |
5493 for Emacs subprocesses. Specify a variable name and a value, both as | |
5494 strings. This command applies only to subprocesses yet to be | |
5495 started. | |
5496 | |
5497 ** Use `rot13-other-window' to examine a buffer with rot13. | |
5498 | |
5499 This command does not change the text in the buffer. Instead, it | |
5500 creates a window with a funny display table that applies the code when | |
5501 displaying the text. | |
5502 | |
5503 ** The command `M-x version' now prints the current Emacs version; The | |
5504 `version' command is an alias for the `emacs-version' command. | |
5505 | |
5506 ** More complex changes in existing packages. | |
5507 | |
5508 *** `fill-nonuniform-paragraphs' is a new command, much like | |
5509 `fill-individual-paragraphs' except that only separator lines separate | |
5510 paragraphs. Since this means that the lines of one paragraph may have | |
5511 different amounts of indentation, the fill prefix used is the smallest | |
5512 amount of indentation of any of the lines of the paragraph. | |
5513 | |
5514 *** Filling is now partially controlled by a new minor mode, Adaptive | |
5515 Fill mode. When this mode is enabled (and it is enabled by default), | |
5516 if you use M-x fill-region-as-paragraph on an indented paragraph and | |
5517 you don't have a fill prefix, it uses the indentation of the second | |
5518 line of the paragraph as the fill prefix. | |
5519 | |
5520 Adaptive Fill mode doesn't have much effect on M-q in most major | |
5521 modes, because an indented line will probably count as a paragraph | |
5522 starter and thus each line of an indented paragraph will be considered | |
5523 a paragraph of its own. | |
5524 | |
5525 *** M-q in C mode now runs `c-fill-paragraph', which is designed | |
5526 for filling C comments. (We assume you don't want to fill | |
5527 the code in a C program.) | |
5528 | |
5529 *** M-$ now runs the Ispell program instead of the Unix spell program. | |
5530 | |
5531 M-$ starts an Ispell process the first time you use it. But the process | |
5532 stays alive, so that subsequent uses of M-$ run very fast. | |
5533 If you want to get rid of the process, use M-x kill-ispell. | |
5534 | |
5535 To check the entire current buffer, use M-x ispell-buffer. | |
5536 Use M-x ispell-region to check just the current region. | |
5537 | |
5538 Ispell commands often involve interactive replacement of words. | |
5539 You can interrupt the interactive replacement with C-g. | |
5540 You can restart it again afterward with C-u M-$. | |
5541 | |
5542 During interactive replacement, you can type the following characters: | |
5543 | |
5544 a Accept this word this time. | |
5545 DIGIT Replace the word (this time) with one of the displayed near-misses. | |
5546 The digit you use says which near-miss to use. | |
5547 i Insert this word in your private dictionary | |
5548 so that Ispell will consider it correct it from now on. | |
5549 r Replace the word this time with a string typed by you. | |
5550 | |
5551 When the Ispell process starts, it reads your private dictionary which | |
5552 is the file `~/ispell.words'. If you "insert" words with the `i' command, | |
5553 these words are added to that file, but not right away--only at the end | |
5554 of the interactive replacement process. | |
5555 | |
5556 Use M-x reload-ispell to reload your private dictionary from | |
5557 `~/ispell.words' if you edit it outside of Ispell. | |
5558 | |
5559 ** Changes in existing modes. | |
5560 | |
5561 *** gdb-mode has been replaced by gud-mode. | |
5562 | |
5563 The package gud.el (Grand Unified Debugger) replaces gdb.el in Emacs | |
5564 19. It provides a gdb.el-like interface to any of three debuggers; | |
5565 gdb itself, the sdb debugger supported on some Unix systems, or the | |
5566 dbx debugger on Berkeley systems. | |
5567 | |
5568 You start it up with one of the commands M-x gdb, M-x sdb, or | |
5569 M-x dbx. Each entry point finishes by executing a hook; gdb-mode-hook, | |
5570 sdb-mode-hook or dbx-mode-hook respectively. | |
5571 | |
5572 These bindings have changed: | |
5573 C-x C-a > gud-down (was M-d) | |
5574 C-x C-a < gud-up (was M-u) | |
5575 C-x C-a C-r gud-cont (was M-c) | |
5576 C-x C-a C-n gud-next (was M-n) | |
5577 C-x C-a C-s gud-step (was M-s) | |
5578 C-x C-a C-i gud-stepi (was M-i) | |
5579 C-x C-a C-l gud-recenter (was C-l) | |
5580 C-d comint-delchar-or-maybe-eof (was C-c C-d) | |
5581 | |
5582 These bindings have been removed: | |
5583 C-c C-r (was comint-show-output; now gud-cont) | |
5584 | |
5585 Since GUD mode uses comint, it uses comint's input history commands, | |
5586 superseding C-c C-y (copy-last-shell-input): | |
5587 M-p comint-next-input | |
5588 M-n comint-previous-input | |
5589 M-r comint-previous-similar-input | |
5590 M-s comint-next-similar-input | |
5591 M-C-r comint-previous-input-matching | |
5592 | |
5593 The C-x C-a bindings are also active in source files. | |
5594 | |
5595 *** The old TeX mode bindings of M-{ and M-} have been moved to C-c { | |
5596 and C-c }. (These commands are `up-list' and `tex-insert-braces'; | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
5597 they are the TeX equivalents of M-( and M-).) This is because M-{ |
25853 | 5598 and M-} are now globally defined commands. |
5599 | |
5600 *** Changes in Mail mode. | |
5601 | |
5602 `%' is now a word-separator character in Mail mode. | |
5603 | |
5604 `mail-signature', if non-nil, tells M-x mail to insert your | |
5605 `.signature' file automatically. If you don't want your signature in | |
5606 a particular message, just delete it before you send the message. | |
5607 | |
5608 You can specify the text to insert at the beginning of each line when | |
5609 you use C-c C-y to yank the message you are replying to. Set | |
5610 `mail-yank-prefix' to the desired string. A value of `nil' (the | |
5611 default) means to use indentation, as in Emacs 18. If you use just | |
5612 C-u as the prefix argument to C-c C-y, then it does not insert | |
5613 anything at the beginning of the lines, regardless of the value of | |
5614 `mail-yank-prefix'. | |
5615 | |
5616 If you like, you can expand mail aliases as abbrevs, as soon as you | |
5617 type them in. To enable this feature, execute the following: | |
5618 | |
5619 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook 'mail-abbrevs-setup) | |
5620 | |
5621 This can go in your .emacs file. | |
5622 | |
5623 Word abbrevs don't expand unless you insert a word-separator character | |
5624 afterward. Any mail aliases that you didn't expand at insertion time | |
5625 are expanded subsequently when you send the message. | |
5626 | |
5627 *** Changes in Rmail. | |
5628 | |
5629 Rmail by default gets new mail only from the system inbox file, | |
5630 not from `~/mbox'. | |
5631 | |
5632 In Rmail, you can retry sending a message that failed | |
5633 by typing `M-m' on the failure message. | |
5634 | |
5635 By contrast, another new command M-x rmail-resend is used for | |
5636 forwarding a message and marking it as "resent from" you | |
5637 with header fields "Resent-From:" and "Resent-To:". | |
5638 | |
5639 `e' is now the command to edit a message. | |
5640 To expunge, type `x'. We know this will surprise people | |
5641 some of the time, but the surprise will not be disastrous--if | |
5642 you type `e' meaning to expunge, just turn off editing with C-c C-c | |
5643 and then type `x'. | |
5644 | |
5645 Another new Rmail command is `<', which moves to the first message. | |
5646 This is for symmetry with `>'. | |
5647 | |
5648 Use the `b' command to bury the Rmail buffer and its summary buffer, | |
5649 if any, removing both of them from display on the screen. | |
5650 | |
5651 The variable `rmail-output-file-alist' now controls the default | |
5652 for the file to output a message to. | |
5653 | |
5654 In the Rmail summary buffer, all cursor motion commands select | |
5655 the message you move to. It's really neat when you use | |
5656 incremental search. | |
5657 | |
5658 You can now issue most Rmail commands from an Rmail summary buffer. | |
5659 The commands do the same thing in that buffer that they do in the | |
5660 Rmail buffer. They apply to the message that is selected in the Rmail | |
5661 buffer, which is always the one described by the current summary | |
5662 line. | |
5663 | |
5664 Conversely, motion and deletion commands in the Rmail buffer also | |
5665 update the summary buffer. If you set the variable | |
5666 `rmail-redisplay-summary' to a non-nil value, then they bring the | |
5667 summary buffer (if one exists) back onto the screen. | |
5668 | |
5669 C-M-t is a new command to make a summary by topic. It uses regexp | |
5670 matching against just the subjects of the messages to decide which | |
5671 messages to show in the summary. | |
5672 | |
5673 You can easily convert an Rmail file to system mailbox format with the | |
5674 command `unrmail'. This command reads two arguments, the name of | |
5675 the Rmail file to convert, and the name of the new mailbox file. | |
5676 (This command does not change the Rmail file itself.) | |
5677 | |
5678 Rmail now handles Content Length fields in messages. | |
5679 | |
5680 *** `mail-extract-address-components' unpacks mail addresses. | |
5681 It takes an address as a string (the contents of the From field, for | |
5682 example) and returns a list of the form (FULL-NAME | |
5683 CANONICAL-ADDRESS). | |
5684 | |
5685 *** Changes in C mode and C-related commands. | |
5686 | |
5687 **** M-x c-up-conditional | |
5688 | |
5689 In C mode, `c-up-conditional' moves back to the containing | |
5690 preprocessor conditional, setting the mark where point was | |
5691 previously. | |
5692 | |
5693 A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative argument, | |
5694 this command moves forward to the end of the containing preprocessor | |
5695 conditional. When going backwards, `#elif' acts like `#else' followed | |
5696 by `#if'. When going forwards, `#elif' is ignored. | |
5697 | |
5698 **** In C mode, M-a and M-e are now defined as | |
5699 `c-beginning-of-statement' and `c-end-of-statement'. | |
5700 | |
5701 **** In C mode, M-x c-backslash-region is a new command to insert or | |
5702 align `\' characters at the ends of the lines of the region, except | |
5703 for the last such line. This is useful after writing or editing a C | |
5704 macro definition. | |
5705 | |
5706 If a line already ends in `\', this command adjusts the amount of | |
5707 whitespace before it. Otherwise, it inserts a new `\'. | |
5708 | |
5709 *** New features in info. | |
5710 | |
5711 When Info looks for an Info file, it searches the directories | |
5712 in `Info-directory-list'. This makes it easy to install the Info files | |
5713 that come with various packages. You can specify the path with | |
5714 the environment variable INFOPATH. | |
5715 | |
5716 There are new commands in Info mode. | |
5717 | |
5718 `]' now moves forward a node, going up and down levels as needed. | |
5719 `[' is similar but moves backward. These two commands try to traverse | |
5720 the entire Info tree, node by node. They are the equivalent of reading | |
5721 a printed manual sequentially. | |
5722 | |
5723 `<' moves to the top node of the current Info file. | |
5724 `>' moves to the last node of the file. | |
5725 | |
5726 SPC scrolls through the current node; at the end, it advances to the | |
5727 next node in depth-first order (like `]'). | |
5728 | |
5729 DEL scrolls backwards in the current node; at the end, it moves to the | |
5730 previous node in depth-first order (like `['). | |
5731 | |
5732 After a menu select, the info `up' command now restores point in the | |
5733 menu. The combination of this and the previous two changes means that | |
5734 repeated SPC keystrokes do the right (depth-first traverse forward) thing. | |
5735 | |
5736 `i STRING RET' moves to the node associated with STRING in the index | |
5737 or indices of this manual. If there is more than one match for | |
5738 STRING, the `i' command finds the first match. | |
5739 | |
5740 `,' finds the next match for the string in the previous `i' command | |
5741 | |
5742 If you click the middle mouse button near a cross-reference, | |
5743 menu item or node pointer while in Info, you will go to the node | |
5744 which is referenced. | |
5745 | |
5746 *** Changes in M-x compile. | |
5747 | |
5748 You can repeat any previous compilation command conveniently using the | |
5749 minibuffer history commands, while in the minibuffer entering the | |
5750 compilation command. | |
5751 | |
5752 While a compilation is going on, the string `Compiling' appears in | |
5753 the mode line. When this string disappears, that tells you the | |
5754 compilation is finished. | |
5755 | |
5756 The buffer of compiler messages is in Compilation mode. This mode | |
5757 provides the keys SPC and DEL to scroll by screenfuls, and M-n and M-p | |
5758 to move to the next or previous error message. You can also use C-c | |
5759 C-c on any error message to find the corresponding source code. | |
5760 | |
5761 Emacs 19 has a more general parser for compiler messages. For example, it | |
5762 can understand messages from lint, and from certain C compilers whose error | |
5763 message format is unusual. Also, it only parses until it sees the error | |
5764 message you want; you never have to wait a long time to see the first | |
5765 error, no matter how big the buffer is. | |
5766 | |
5767 *** M-x diff and M-x diff-backup. | |
5768 | |
5769 This new command compares two files, displaying the differences in an | |
5770 Emacs buffer. The options for the `diff' program come from the | |
5771 variable `diff-switches', whose value should be a string. | |
5772 | |
5773 The buffer of differences has Compilation mode as its major mode, so you | |
5774 can use C-x ` to visit successive changed locations in the two | |
5775 source files, or you can move to a particular hunk of changes and type | |
5776 C-c C-c to move to the corresponding source. You can also use the | |
5777 other special commands of Compilation mode: SPC and DEL for | |
5778 scrolling, and M-n and M-p for cursor motion. | |
5779 | |
5780 M-x diff-backup compares a file with its most recent backup. | |
5781 If you specify the name of a backup file, `diff-backup' compares it | |
5782 with the source file that it is a backup of. | |
5783 | |
5784 *** The View commands (such as M-x view-buffer and M-x view-file) no | |
5785 longer use recursive edits; instead, they switch temporarily to a | |
5786 different major mode (View mode) specifically designed for moving | |
5787 around through a buffer without editing it. | |
5788 | |
5789 *** Changes in incremental search. | |
5790 | |
5791 **** The character to terminate an incremental search is now RET. | |
5792 This is for compatibility with the way most other arguments are read. | |
5793 | |
5794 To search for a newline in an incremental search, type LFD (also known | |
5795 as C-j). | |
5796 | |
5797 **** Incremental search now maintains a ring of previous search | |
5798 strings. Use M-p and M-n to move through the ring to pick a search | |
5799 string to reuse. These commands leave the selected search ring | |
5800 element in the minibuffer, where you can edit it. Type C-s or C-r to | |
5801 finish editing and search for the chosen string. | |
5802 | |
5803 **** If you type an upper case letter in incremental search, that turns | |
5804 off case-folding, so that you get a case-sensitive search. | |
5805 | |
5806 **** If you type a space during regexp incremental search, it matches | |
5807 any sequence of whitespace characters. If you want to match just a space, | |
5808 type C-q SPC. | |
5809 | |
5810 **** Incremental search is now implemented as a major mode. When you | |
5811 type C-s, it switches temporarily to a different keymap which defines | |
5812 each key to do what it ought to do for incremental search. This has | |
5813 next to no effect on the user-visible behavior of searching, but makes | |
5814 it easier to customize that behavior. | |
5815 | |
5816 Emacs 19 eliminates the old variables `search-...-char' that used to | |
5817 be the way to specify the characters to use for various special | |
5818 purposes in incremental search. Instead, you can define the meaning | |
5819 of a character in incremental search by modifying `isearch-mode-map'. | |
5820 | |
5821 *** New commands in Buffer Menu mode. | |
5822 | |
5823 The command C-o now displays the current line's buffer in another | |
5824 window but does not select it. This is like the existing command `o' | |
5825 which selects the current line's buffer in another window. | |
5826 | |
5827 The command % toggles the read-only flag of the current line's buffer. | |
5828 | |
5829 The way to switch to a set of several buffers, including those marked | |
5830 with m, is now v. The q command simply quits, replacing the buffer | |
5831 menu buffer with the buffer that was displayed previously. | |
5832 | |
5833 ** New major modes and packages. | |
5834 | |
5835 *** The news reader GNUS is now installed. | |
5836 | |
5837 *** There is a new interface for version control systems, called VC. | |
5838 It works with both RCS and SCCS; in fact, you don't really have to | |
5839 know which one of them is being used, because it automatically deals | |
5840 with either one. | |
5841 | |
5842 Most of the time, the only command you have to know about is C-x C-q. | |
5843 This command normally toggles the read-only flag of the current | |
5844 buffer. If the buffer is visiting a file that is maintained with a | |
5845 version control system, the command still toggles read-only, but does | |
5846 so by checking the file in or checking it out. | |
5847 | |
5848 When you check a file in, VC asks you for a log entry by popping up a | |
5849 buffer. Edit the entry there, then type C-c C-c when it is ready. | |
5850 That's when the actual checkin happens. If you change your mind about | |
5851 the checkin, simply switch buffers and don't ever go back to the log | |
5852 buffer. | |
5853 | |
5854 To start using version control for a file, use the command C-x v v. | |
5855 This works like C-x C-q (performing the next logical version-control | |
5856 operation needed to change the file's writability) but it will also | |
5857 perform initial checkin on an unregistered file. | |
5858 | |
5859 By default, VC uses RCS if RCS is installed on your machine; | |
5860 otherwise, SCCS. If you want to make the choice explicitly, you can do | |
5861 it by setting `vc-default-back-end' to the symbol `RCS' or the symbol | |
5862 `SCCS'. | |
5863 | |
5864 You can tell when a file you visit is maintained with version control | |
5865 because either `RCS' or `SCCS' appears in the mode line. | |
5866 | |
5867 *** A new Calendar mode has been added, the work of Edward M. Reingold. | |
5868 The mode can display the Gregorian calendar and a variety of other | |
5869 calendars at any date, and interacts with a diary facility similar to | |
5870 the UNIX `calendar' utility. | |
5871 | |
5872 *** There is a new major mode for editing binary files: Hexl mode. | |
5873 To use it, use M-x hexl-find-file instead of C-x C-f to visit the file. | |
5874 This command converts the file's contents to hexadecimal and lets you | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
5875 edit the translation. When you save the file, it is converted |
25853 | 5876 automatically back to binary. |
5877 | |
5878 You can also use M-x hexl-mode to translate an existing buffer into hex. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
5879 Do this if you have already visited a binary file. |
25853 | 5880 |
5881 Hexl mode has a few other commands: | |
5882 | |
5883 C-M-d insert a byte with a code typed in decimal. | |
5884 C-M-o insert a byte with a code typed in octal. | |
5885 C-M-x insert a byte with a code typed in hex. | |
5886 | |
5887 C-x [ move to the beginning of a 1k-byte "page". | |
5888 C-x ] move to the end of a 1k-byte "page". | |
5889 | |
5890 M-g go to an address specified in hex. | |
5891 M-j go to an address specified in decimal. | |
5892 | |
5893 C-c C-c leave hexl mode and go back to the previous major mode. | |
5894 | |
5895 *** Miscellaneous new major modes include Awk mode, Icon mode, Makefile | |
5896 mode, Perl mode and SGML mode. | |
5897 | |
5898 *** Edebug, a new source-level debugger for Emacs Lisp functions. | |
5899 | |
5900 To use Edebug, use the command M-x edebug-defun to "evaluate" a | |
5901 function definition in an Emacs Lisp file. We put "evaluate" in | |
5902 quotation marks because it doesn't just evaluate the function, it also | |
5903 inserts additional information to support source-level debugging. | |
5904 | |
5905 You must also do | |
5906 | |
5907 (setq debugger 'edebug-debug) | |
5908 | |
5909 to cause errors and single-stepping to use Edebug instead of the usual | |
5910 Emacs Lisp debugger. | |
5911 | |
5912 For more information, see the Edebug manual, which should be included | |
5913 in the Emacs distribution. | |
5914 | |
5915 *** C++ mode is like C mode, except that it understands C++ comment syntax | |
5916 and certain other differences between C and C++. It also has a command | |
5917 `fill-c++-comment' which fills a paragraph made of comment lines. | |
5918 | |
5919 The command `comment-region' is useful in C++ mode for commenting out | |
5920 several consecutive lines, or removing the commenting out of such lines. | |
5921 | |
5922 *** A new package for merging two variants of the same text. | |
5923 | |
5924 It's not unusual for programmers to get their signals crossed and | |
5925 modify the same program in two different directions. Then somebody | |
5926 has to merge the two versions. The command `emerge-files' makes this | |
5927 easier. | |
5928 | |
5929 `emerge-files' reads two file names and compares them. Then it | |
5930 displays three buffers: one for each file, and one for the | |
5931 differences. | |
5932 | |
5933 If the original version of the file is available, you can make things | |
5934 even easier using `emerge-files-with-ancestor'. It reads three file | |
5935 names--variant 1, variant 2, and the common ancestor--and uses diff3 | |
5936 to compare them. | |
5937 | |
5938 You control the merging interactively. The main loop of Emerge | |
5939 consists of showing you one set of differences, asking you what to do | |
5940 about them, and doing it. You have a choice of two modes for giving | |
5941 directions to Emerge: "fast" mode and "edit" mode. | |
5942 | |
5943 In Fast mode, Emerge commands are single characters, and ordinary | |
5944 Emacs commands are disabled. This makes Emerge operations fast, but | |
5945 prevents you from doing more than selecting the A or the B version of | |
5946 differences. In Edit mode, all emerge commands use the C-c prefix, | |
5947 and the usual Emacs commands are available. This allows editing the | |
5948 merge buffer, but slows down Emerge operations. Edit and fast modes | |
5949 are indicated by `F' and `E' in the minor modes in the mode line. | |
5950 | |
5951 The Emerge commands are: | |
5952 | |
5953 p go to the previous difference | |
5954 n go to the next difference | |
5955 a select the A version of this difference | |
5956 b select the B version of this difference | |
5957 j go to a particular difference (prefix argument | |
5958 specifies which difference) (0j suppresses display of | |
5959 the flags) | |
5960 q quit - finish the merge* | |
5961 f go into fast mode | |
5962 e go into edit mode | |
5963 l recenter (C-l) all three windows* | |
5964 - and 0 through 9 | |
5965 prefix numeric arguments | |
5966 d a select the A version as the default from here down in | |
5967 the merge buffer* | |
5968 d b select the B version as the default from here down in | |
5969 the merge buffer* | |
5970 c a copy the A version of the difference into the kill | |
5971 ring | |
5972 c b copy the B version of the difference into the kill | |
5973 ring | |
5974 i a insert the A version of the difference at the point | |
5975 i b insert the B version of the difference at the point | |
5976 m put the point and mark around the difference region | |
5977 ^ scroll-down (like M-v) the three windows* | |
5978 v scroll-up (like C-v) the three windows* | |
5979 < scroll-left (like C-x <) the three windows* | |
5980 > scroll-right (like C-x >) the three windows* | |
5981 | reset horizontal scroll on the three windows* | |
5982 x 1 shrink the merge window to one line (use C-u l to restore it | |
5983 to full size) | |
5984 x a find the difference containing a location in the A buffer* | |
5985 x b find the difference containing a location in the B buffer* | |
5986 x c combine the two versions of this difference* | |
5987 x C combine the two versions of this difference, using a | |
5988 register's value as the template* | |
5989 x d find the difference containing a location in the merge buffer* | |
5990 x f show the files/buffers Emerge is operating on in Help window | |
5991 (use C-u l to restore windows) | |
5992 x j join this difference with the following one | |
5993 (C-u x j joins this difference with the previous one) | |
5994 x l show line numbers of points in A, B, and merge buffers | |
5995 x m change major mode of merge buffer* | |
5996 x s split this difference into two differences | |
5997 (first position the point in all three buffers to the places | |
5998 to split the difference) | |
5999 x t trim identical lines off top and bottom of difference | |
6000 (such lines occur when the A and B versions are | |
6001 identical but differ from the ancestor version) | |
6002 x x set the template for the x c command* | |
6003 | |
6004 Normally, the merged output goes back in the first file specified. | |
6005 If you use a prefix argument, Emerge reads another file name to use | |
6006 for the output file. | |
6007 | |
6008 Once Emerge has prepared the buffer of differences, it runs the hooks | |
6009 in `emerge-startup-hooks'. | |
6010 | |
6011 *** Asm mode is a new major mode for editing files of assembler code. | |
6012 It defines these commands: | |
6013 | |
6014 TAB tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6015 LFD Insert a newline and then indent using tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6016 : Insert a colon and then remove the indentation | |
6017 from before the label preceding colon. Then tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6018 ; Insert or align a comment. | |
6019 | |
6020 *** Two-column mode lets you conveniently edit two side-by-side columns | |
6021 of text. It works using two side-by-side windows, each showing its | |
6022 own buffer. | |
6023 | |
6024 Here are three ways to enter two-column mode: | |
6025 | |
6026 C-x 6 2 makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer. In the | |
6027 right-hand window it puts a buffer whose name is based on the current | |
6028 buffer's name. | |
6029 | |
6030 C-x 6 b BUFFER RET makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer, | |
6031 and uses buffer BUFFER as the right-hand buffer. | |
6032 | |
6033 C-x 6 s splits the current buffer, which contains two-column text, | |
6034 into two side-by-side buffers. The old current buffer becomes the | |
6035 left-hand buffer, but the text in the right column is moved into the | |
6036 right-hand buffer. The current column specifies the split point. | |
6037 Splitting starts with the current line and continues to the end of the | |
6038 buffer. | |
6039 | |
6040 C-x 6 s takes a prefix argument which specifies how many characters | |
6041 before point constitute the column separator. (The default argument | |
6042 is 1, as usual, so by default the column separator is the character | |
6043 before point.) Lines that don't have the column separator at the | |
6044 proper place remain unsplit; they stay in the left-hand buffer, and | |
6045 the right-hand buffer gets an empty line to correspond. | |
6046 | |
6047 You can scroll both buffers together using C-x 6 SPC (scroll up), C-x | |
6048 6 DEL (scroll down), and C-x 6 RET (scroll up one line). C-x 6 C-l | |
6049 recenters both buffers together. | |
6050 | |
6051 If you want to make a line which will span both columns, put it in | |
6052 the left-hand buffer, with an empty line in the corresponding place in | |
6053 the right-hand buffer. | |
6054 | |
6055 When you have edited both buffers as you wish, merge them with C-x 6 | |
6056 1. This copies the text from the right-hand buffer as a second column | |
6057 in the other buffer. To go back to two-column editing, use C-x 6 s. | |
6058 | |
6059 Use C-x 6 d to disassociate the two buffers, leaving each as it | |
6060 stands. (If the other buffer, the one that was not current when you | |
6061 type C-x 6 d, is empty, C-x 6 d kills it.) | |
6062 | |
6063 *** You can supply command arguments such as files to visit to an Emacs | |
6064 that is already running. To do this, you must do this in your .emacs | |
6065 file: | |
6066 (add-hook 'suspend-hook 'resume-suspend-hook) | |
6067 Also you must use the shellscript emacs.csh or emacs.sh, found in the | |
6068 etc subdirectory. | |
6069 | |
6070 *** Shell mode has been completely replaced. | |
6071 The basic idea is the same, but there are new commands available in | |
6072 this mode. | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
6073 |
25853 | 6074 TAB now completes the file name before point in the shell buffer. |
6075 To get a list of all possible completions, type M-?. | |
6076 | |
6077 There is a new convenient history mechanism for repeating previous | |
6078 commands. Use the command M-p to recall the last command; it copies | |
6079 the text of that command to the place where you are editing. If you | |
6080 repeat M-p, it replaces the copied command with the previous command. | |
6081 M-n is similar but goes in the opposite direction towards the present. | |
6082 When you find the command you wanted, you can edit it, or just | |
6083 resubmit it by typing RET. | |
6084 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
6085 You can also use M-r and M-s to search for (respectively) earlier or |
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
6086 later inputs starting with a given string. First type the string, |
25853 | 6087 then type M-r to yank a previous input from the history which starts |
6088 with that string. You can repeat M-r to find successively earlier | |
6089 inputs starting with the same string. You can start moving in the | |
6090 opposite direction (toward more recent inputs) by typing M-s instead | |
6091 of M-r. As long as you don't use any commands except M-r and M-s, | |
6092 they keep using the same string that you had entered initially. | |
6093 | |
6094 C-c C-o kills the last batch of output from a shell command. This is | |
6095 useful if a shell command spews out lots of output that just gets in | |
6096 the way. | |
6097 | |
6098 C-c C-r scrolls to display the beginning of the last batch of output | |
6099 at the top of the window; it also moves the cursor there. | |
6100 | |
6101 C-a on a line that starts with a shell prompt moves to the end of the | |
6102 prompt, not to the very beginning of the line. | |
6103 | |
6104 C-d typed at the end of the shell buffer sends EOF to the subshell. | |
6105 At any other position in the buffer, it deletes a character as usual. | |
6106 | |
6107 If Emacs gets confused while trying to track changes in the shell's | |
6108 current directory, type M-x dirs to re-synchronize. | |
6109 | |
6110 M-x send-invisible reads a line of text without echoing it, and | |
6111 sends it to the shell. | |
6112 | |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
6113 If you accidentally suspend your process, use M-x comint-continue-subjob |
25853 | 6114 to continue it. |
49600
23a1cea22d13
Trailing whitespace deleted.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
46989
diff
changeset
|
6115 |
25853 | 6116 *** There is now a convenient way to enable flow control on terminals |
6117 where you can't win without it. Suppose you want to do this on | |
6118 VT-100 and H19 terminals; put the following in your `.emacs' file: | |
6119 | |
6120 (enable-flow-control-on "vt100" "h19") | |
6121 | |
6122 When flow control is enabled, you must type C-\ to get the effect of a | |
6123 C-s, and type C-^ to get the effect of a C-q. | |
6124 | |
6125 The function `enable-flow-control' enables flow control unconditionally. | |
6126 | |
6127 ** Changes in Dired | |
6128 | |
6129 Dired has many new features which allow you to do these things: | |
6130 | |
6131 - Rename, copy, or make links to many files at once. | |
6132 | |
6133 - Make distinguishable types of marks for different operations. | |
6134 | |
6135 - Display contents of subdirectories in the same Dired buffer as the | |
6136 parent directory. | |
6137 | |
6138 *** Setting and Clearing Marks | |
6139 | |
6140 There are now two kinds of marker that you can put on a file in Dired: | |
6141 `D' for deletion, and `*' for any other kind of operation. | |
6142 The `x' command deletes only files marked with `D', and most | |
6143 other Dired commands operate only on the files marked with `*'. | |
6144 | |
6145 To mark files with `D' (also called "flagging" the files), you | |
6146 can use `d' as usual. Here are some commands for marking with | |
6147 `*' (and also for unmarking): | |
6148 | |
6149 **** `m' marks the current file with `*', for an operation other than | |
6150 deletion. | |
6151 | |
6152 **** `*' marks all executable files. With a prefix argument, it | |
6153 unmarks all those files. | |
6154 | |
6155 **** `@' marks all symbolic links. With a prefix argument, it unmarks | |
6156 all those files. | |
6157 | |
6158 **** `/' marks all directory files except `.' and `..'. With a prefix | |
6159 argument, it unmarks all those files. | |
6160 | |
6161 **** M-DEL removes a specific or all marks from every file. With an | |
6162 argument, queries for each marked file. Type your help character, | |
6163 usually C-h, at that time for help. | |
6164 | |
6165 **** `c' replaces all marks that use the character OLD with marks that | |
6166 use the character NEW. You can use almost any character as a mark | |
6167 character by means of this command, to distinguish various classes of | |
6168 files. If OLD is ` ', then the command operates on all unmarked | |
6169 files; if NEW is ` ', then the command unmarks the files it acts on. | |
6170 | |
6171 *** Operating on Multiple Files | |
6172 | |
6173 The Dired commands to operate directly on files (rename them, copy | |
6174 them, and so on) have been generalized to work on multiple files. | |
6175 There are also some additional commands in this series. | |
6176 | |
6177 All of these commands use the same convention to decide which files to | |
6178 manipulate: | |
6179 | |
6180 - If you give the command a numeric prefix argument @var{n}, it operates | |
6181 on the next @var{n} files, starting with the current file. | |
6182 | |
6183 - Otherwise, if there are marked files, the commands operate on all the | |
6184 marked files. | |
6185 | |
6186 - Otherwise, the command operates on the current file only. | |
6187 | |
6188 These are the commands: | |
6189 | |
6190 **** `C' copies the specified files. You must specify a directory to | |
6191 copy into, or (if copying a single file) a new name. | |
6192 | |
6193 If `dired-copy-preserve-time' is non-`nil', then copying sets | |
6194 the modification time of the new file to be the same as that of the old | |
6195 file. | |
6196 | |
6197 **** `R' renames the specified files. You must specify a directory to | |
6198 rename into, or (if renaming a single file) a new name. | |
6199 | |
6200 Dired automatically changes the visited file name of buffers associated | |
6201 with renamed files so that they refer to the new names. | |
6202 | |
6203 **** `H' makes hard links to the specified files. You must specify a | |
6204 directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the name | |
6205 to give the link. | |
6206 | |
6207 **** `S' makes symbolic links to the specified files. You must specify | |
6208 a directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the | |
6209 name to give the link. | |
6210 | |
6211 **** `M' changes the mode of the specified files. This calls the | |
6212 `chmod' program, so you can describe the desired mode change with any | |
6213 argument that `chmod' would handle. | |
6214 | |
6215 **** `G' changes the group of the specified files. | |
6216 | |
6217 **** `O' changes the owner of the specified files. (On normal systems, | |
6218 only the superuser can do this.) | |
6219 | |
6220 The variable `dired-chown-program' specifies the name of the | |
6221 program to use to do the work (different systems put `chown' in | |
6222 different places. | |
6223 | |
6224 **** `Z' compresses or uncompresses the specified files. | |
6225 | |
6226 **** `L' loads the specified Emacs Lisp files. | |
6227 | |
6228 **** `B' byte compiles the specified Emacs Lisp files. | |
6229 | |
6230 **** `P' prints the specified files. It uses the variables | |
6231 `lpr-command' and `lpr-switches' just as `lpr-file' does. | |
6232 | |
6233 *** Shell Commands in Dired | |
6234 | |
6235 `!' reads a shell command string in the minibuffer and runs the shell | |
6236 command on all the specified files. There are two ways of applying a | |
6237 shell command to multiple files: | |
6238 | |
6239 - If you use `*' in the command, then the shell command runs just | |
6240 once, with the list of file names substituted for the `*'. | |
6241 | |
6242 Thus, `! tar cf foo.tar * RET' runs `tar' on the entire list of file | |
6243 names, putting them into one tar file `foo.tar'. The file names are | |
6244 inserted in the order that they appear in the Dired buffer. | |
6245 | |
6246 - If the command string doesn't contain `*', then it runs once for | |
6247 each file, with the file name attached at the end. For example, `! | |
6248 uudecode RET' runs `uudecode' on each file. | |
6249 | |
6250 To run the shell command once for each file but without being limited | |
6251 to putting the file name inserted in the middle, use a shell loop. | |
6252 For example, this shell command would run `uuencode' on each of the | |
6253 specified files, writing the output into a corresponding `.uu' file: | |
6254 | |
6255 for file in *; uuencode $file $file >$file.uu; done | |
6256 | |
6257 The working directory for the shell command is the top level directory | |
6258 of the Dired buffer. | |
6259 | |
6260 *** Regular Expression File Name Substitution | |
6261 | |
6262 **** `% m REGEXP RET' marks all files whose names match the regular | |
6263 expression REGEXP. | |
6264 | |
6265 Only the non-directory part of the file name is used in matching. Use | |
6266 `^' and `$' to anchor matches. Exclude subdirs by hiding them. | |
6267 | |
6268 **** `% d REGEXP RET' flags for deletion all files whose names match | |
6269 the regular expression REGEXP. | |
6270 | |
6271 **** `% R', `% C', `% H', `% S' | |
6272 | |
6273 These four commands rename, copy, make hard links and make soft links, | |
6274 in each case computing the new name by regular expression substitution | |
6275 from the name of the old file. They effectively perform | |
6276 `query-replace-regexp' on the selected file names in the Dired buffer. | |
6277 | |
6278 The commands read two arguments: a regular expression, and a | |
6279 substitution pattern. Each selected file name is matched against the | |
6280 regular expression, and then the part which matched is replaced with | |
6281 the substitution pattern. You can use `\&' and `\DIGIT' in the | |
6282 substitution pattern to refer to all or part of the old file name. | |
6283 | |
6284 If the regular expression matches more than once in a file name, | |
6285 only the first match is replaced. | |
6286 | |
6287 Normally, the replacement process does not consider the directory names; | |
6288 it operates on the file name within the directory. If you specify a | |
6289 prefix argument of zero, then replacement affects entire file name. | |
6290 | |
6291 To apply the command to all files matching the same regexp that you | |
6292 use in the command, mark those files with `% m REGEXP RET', then use | |
6293 the same regular expression in `% R'. To make this easier, `% R' uses | |
6294 as a default the last regular expression specified in a `%' command. | |
6295 | |
6296 *** Dired Case Conversion | |
6297 | |
6298 **** `% u' renames each of the selected files to an upper case name. | |
6299 | |
6300 **** `% l' renames each of the selected files to a lower case name. | |
6301 | |
6302 *** File Comparison with Dired | |
6303 | |
6304 **** `=' compares the current file with another file (the file at the | |
6305 mark), by running the `diff' program. The file at the mark is given | |
6306 to `diff' first. | |
6307 | |
6308 **** `M-=' compares the current file with its backup file. If there | |
6309 are several numerical backups, it uses the most recent one. If this | |
6310 file is a backup, it is compared with its original. | |
6311 | |
6312 The backup file is the first file given to `diff'. | |
6313 | |
6314 *** Subdirectories in Dired | |
6315 | |
6316 You can display more than one directory in one Dired buffer. | |
6317 The simplest way to do this is to specify the options `-lR' for | |
6318 running `ls'. That produces a recursive directory listing showing | |
6319 all subdirectories, all within the same Dired buffer. | |
6320 | |
6321 You can also insert the contents of a particular subdirectory with the | |
6322 `i' command. Use this command on the line that describes a file which | |
6323 is a directory. Inserted subdirectory contents follow the top-level | |
6324 directory of the Dired buffer, just as they do in `ls -lR' output. | |
6325 | |
6326 If the subdirectory's contents are already present in the buffer, the | |
6327 `i' command just moves to it (type `l' to refresh it). It sets the | |
6328 Emacs mark before moving, so C-x C-x takes you back to the old | |
6329 position in the buffer. | |
6330 | |
6331 When you have subdirectories in the Dired buffer, you can use the page | |
6332 motion commands C-x [ and C-x ] to move by entire directories. | |
6333 | |
6334 The following commands move up and down in the tree of directories | |
6335 in one Dired buffer: | |
6336 | |
6337 **** C-M-u Go up to the parent directory's headerline. | |
6338 | |
6339 **** C-M-d Go down in the tree, to the first subdirectory's | |
6340 headerline. | |
6341 | |
6342 **** C-M-n Go to next subdirectory headerline, regardless of level. | |
6343 | |
6344 **** C-M-p Go to previous subdirectory headerline, regardless of | |
6345 level. | |
6346 | |
6347 *** Hiding Subdirectories | |
6348 | |
6349 "Hiding" a subdirectory means to make it invisible, except for its | |
6350 headerline. Files inside a hidden subdirectory are never considered | |
6351 by Dired. For example, the commands to operate on marked files ignore | |
6352 files in hidden directories even if they are marked. | |
6353 | |
6354 **** `$' hides or unhides the current subdirectory and move to next | |
6355 subdirectory. A prefix argument serves as a repeat count. | |
6356 | |
6357 **** `M-$' hides all subdirectories, leaving only their header lines. | |
6358 Or, if at least one subdirectory is currently hidden, it makes | |
6359 everything visible again. You can use this command to get an overview | |
6360 in very deep directory trees or to move quickly to subdirectories far | |
6361 away. | |
6362 | |
6363 *** Editing the Dired Buffer | |
6364 | |
6365 **** `l' updates the specified files in a Dired buffer. This means | |
6366 reading their current status from the file system and changing the | |
6367 buffer to reflect it properly. | |
6368 | |
6369 If you use this command on a subdirectory header line, it updates the | |
6370 contents of the subdirectory. | |
6371 | |
6372 **** `g' updates the entire contents of the Dired buffer. It preserves | |
6373 all marks except for those on files that have vanished. Hidden | |
6374 subdirectories are updated but remain hidden. | |
6375 | |
6376 **** `k' kills all marked lines (not the files). With a prefix | |
6377 argument, it kills that many lines starting with the current line. | |
6378 | |
6379 This command does not delete files; it just deletes text from the Dired | |
6380 buffer. | |
6381 | |
6382 If you kill the line for a file that is a directory, then its contents | |
6383 are also deleted from the buffer. Typing `C-u k' on the header line | |
6384 for a subdirectory is another way to delete a subdirectory from the | |
6385 Dired buffer. | |
6386 | |
6387 *** `find' and Dired. | |
6388 | |
6389 To search for files with names matching a wildcard pattern use | |
6390 `find-name-dired'. Its arguments are DIRECTORY and | |
6391 PATTERN. It selects all the files in DIRECTORY or its | |
6392 subdirectories whose own names match PATTERN. | |
6393 | |
6394 The files thus selected are displayed in a Dired buffer in which the | |
6395 ordinary Dired commands are available. | |
6396 | |
6397 If you want to test the contents of files, rather than their names, use | |
6398 `find-grep-dired'. This command takes two minibuffer arguments, | |
6399 DIRECTORY and REGEXP; it selects all the files in | |
6400 DIRECTORY or its subdirectories that contain a match for | |
6401 REGEXP. It works by running `find' and `grep'. | |
6402 | |
6403 The most general command in this series is `find-dired', which lets | |
6404 you specify any condition that `find' can test. It takes two | |
6405 minibuffer arguments, DIRECTORY and FIND-ARGS; it runs `find' in | |
6406 DIRECTORY with using FIND-ARGS as the arguments to `find' specifying | |
6407 which files to accept. To use this command, you need to know how to | |
6408 use `find'. | |
6409 | |
6410 ** New amusements and novelties. | |
6411 | |
6412 *** `M-x mpuz' displays a multiplication puzzle, in which each letter | |
6413 stands for a digit, and you must determine which digit. The puzzles | |
6414 are determined randomly, so they are always different. | |
6415 | |
6416 *** `M-x gomoku' plays the game Gomoku with you. It needs more work. | |
6417 | |
6418 *** `M-x spook' adds a line of randomly chosen keywords to an outgoing | |
6419 mail message. The keywords are chosen from a list of words that | |
6420 suggest you are discussing something subversive. | |
6421 | |
6422 The idea is that the NSA reads all messages that contain keywords | |
6423 suggesting they might be interested, and that adding these lines could | |
6424 help to overload them. I would guess that they have modified their | |
6425 program by now to ignore these lines of keywords; perhaps the program | |
6426 can be updated if some clever hacker can determine what criterion they | |
6427 actually use now. | |
6428 | |
6429 ** Installation changes | |
6430 | |
6431 *** The configure script has been provided to help with the | |
6432 installation process. It takes the place of editing the Makefiles and | |
6433 src/config.h, and can often guess the appropriate operating system to | |
6434 use for a particular machine type. See INSTALL for a more detailed | |
6435 description of the steps required for installation. | |
6436 | |
6437 *** If you create a Lisp file named `site-start.el', Emacs loads the file | |
6438 whenever it starts up. | |
6439 | |
6440 *** A new Lisp variable, `data-directory', indicates the directory | |
6441 containing the DOC file, tutorial, copying agreement, and other | |
6442 familiar `etc' files. The value of `data-directory' is a simple string. | |
6443 The default should be set at build time, and the person installing | |
6444 Emacs should place all the data files in this directory. The `help.el' | |
6445 functions that look for docstrings and information files check this | |
6446 variable. All Emacs Lisp packages should also be coded so that they | |
6447 refer to `data-directory' to find data files. | |
6448 | |
6449 *** The PURESIZE definition has been moved from config.h to its own | |
6450 file, puresize.h. Since almost every file of C source in the | |
6451 distribution depends on config.h, but only alloc.c and data.c depend | |
6452 on puresize.h, this means that changing the value of PURESIZE causes | |
6453 only those two files to be recompiled. | |
6454 | |
6455 *** The makefile at the top of the Emacs source tree now supports a | |
6456 `dist' target, which creates a compressed tar file suitable for | |
6457 distribution, using the contents of the source tree. Object files, | |
6458 old file versions, executables, DOC files, and other | |
6459 architecture-specific or easy-to-recreate files are not included in | |
6460 the tar file. | |
6461 | |
33149 | 6462 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.4. For Lisp changes in (the first |
25853 | 6463 * release of) Emacs 19, see the file LNEWS. |
6464 | |
6465 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
6466 Copyright information: | |
6467 | |
6468 Copyright (C) 1993, 1994, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | |
6469 | |
6470 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
6471 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
6472 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
6473 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
6474 | |
6475 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
6476 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
6477 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
6478 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
6479 | |
6480 Local variables: | |
6481 mode: outline | |
6482 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
6483 end: | |
6484 | |
52401 | 6485 arch-tag: 944be39b-afe8-4217-9977-c745b68a7ca2 |